Mentum Planet User Guide
Short Description
Mentum Planet...
Description
>> Mentum Planet User Guide version 5.3.1
Copyright © 2011 Mentum S.A. All rights reserved.
Notice This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Mentum S.A. and may not be copied, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or reproduced in any format or media, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of Mentum S.A. Information contained in this document supersedes that found in any previous manuals, guides, specifications data sheets, or other informationthat may have been provided or made available to the user. This document is provided for informational purposes only, and Mentum S.A. does not warrant or guarantee the accuracy, adequacy, quality, validity, completeness or suitability for any purpose the information contained in this document. Mentum S.A. may update, improve, and enhance this document and the products to which it relates at any time without prior notice to the user. MENTUM S.A. MAKES NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING , WITHOUT LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THIS DOCUMENT OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN.
Trademark Acknowledgement Mentum, Mentum Planet, Mentum Ellipse, Mentum Fusion, Mentum CellPlanner, and Mentum LinkPlanner are registered trademarks owned by Mentum S.A. MapInfo Professional is a registered trademark of PB MapInfo Corporation. iBwave is a trademark owned by iBwave. This document may contain other trademarks, trade names, or service marks of other organizations, each of which is the property of its respective owner. Last updated July 11, 2011
Contents Chapte r1Introduction
1
Fe ature s ofMe ntumPlane t
2
Project Explorer
2
Site Editor
2
Traffic MapGenerator
2
InterferenceMatrix Generator
2
NeighborPlan Generator
3
Network DataImport Wizard
3
Survey Data tool
3
Subscriber Settings
3
Data Manager
3
Microwave Links
4
MapInfo Profe ssional
4
Usingthis documentation User documentation updates Help
Online
5 5 5
Documentation library Notational conventions
7 7
Textual conventions
7
O rganiz ationofthis use rguide Chapte r 2 Cre ating Ge ne ricProje cts Understanding gene ricproje cts Cr e ating a gene ric proje ct To create a gener ic project
9 11 12 14 14
To view or ed it project settings Op ening and closing proje cts
16 18
Mentum Planet User Guide i
To open project a
18
Saving proje cts
19
To save project a
19
To back up a project
19
R e storingproje cts
20
To restore a project
20
Chapte r 3 Working with Site sa nd Se ctors
21
Displaying and formatting site labels
22
To display site labels
22
To hide site labels
22
To format sitelabels site sChoosing
22 24
To choose sites and sectors from the Project Explorer
24
To choose sites and s ectors usingtheSelect tools
25
site sGrouping
26
To group sitesb yp ropertiesi nt he ProjectE xplorer
26
To copy groupedsitesi nt heProjectE xplorer
26
To ungroup sites in the Proje ct Explorer
27
Finding and selecting sites and sectors in the Map window
28
To find a site in the Map window To find a sector i n the Map window
28 28
To find and displaya site with user-selected zoom
28
To select a site or se ctorin theMapwindow
29
Using q ueries to id e ntify se ctors
30
Tousequeries toidentify sectors
31
Working with sites To display information about site a Tocopy asiteorsectorintoagroup
ii Mentum Planet User Guide
34 34 34
Tocloneasectorat asite
35
Toswapsiteandsectorparameters
35
To rename site a
35
Torefresh thesites list
36
To delete sitesf rom the ProjectE xplorer
36
Todeletesites fromtheMapwindow Tochangetheantennaforasector
36 36
Usingsectorplaceme nttools
38
To use theMaximum Find Point tool
38
To use the AngleLine From tool
39
To use the Draw Angle tool
39
Working w ith sector groups
41
To create a sector grou p
41
To display a group in a Map window
42
Editing sector groups
43
To rena me a group
43
To remove a site sector or fromagroup
43
To delete a gr oup
43
To refres h the groups list
44
To edit groupsf rom the Site Propertiesd ialog box
44
Working with flags
45
Example
45
To create a flag
46
To add a co ndition To applyf lag conditionst o one or more sites
46 47
To display sectorsb asedonf lagconditions
48
Editing flags and conditions
49
To rename a f lag
49
To rename condition a
49
Mentum Planet User Guide iii
Todeleteaflagorcondition
49
Toinvert flagconditions
49
Modifying se ctor symbols for individual site s
51
To modify color and symbol settings for individual sites
51
C ustomiz ing se ctor symbols for multiple site s
52
Tocreateasectordisplay scheme Todefine ana ctivesectordisplays cheme
53 56
Toaddasectordisplay scheme
57
To apply display a sector scheme
57
To app ly the d efault sectorsymbol
59
Adding custom data
60
Local custom data
60
Shared custom data
60
To add data local custom
61
To a dd shared custom data O ptimizing sitea single
61 62
To op timize single a site
62
Chapter 4 Ma nagingAntennaSyste ms Understanding ante nnasyste ms How antenna systemsa re used inn etworkp lanning
70 71 71
Optimization ofantennapatterns
73
Requiredaccuracyf orantennapatterns
74
Antenna pattern forma ts
75
Workflow fo r adding antenna patterns to a proje ct
76
Workflow for mode ling ante nna patte rns Importing antenna patterns in the NSMA or Planfet o rm a t To import an antenna pattern in .dpaformat ImportingMultipleAnte nnaFile s
iv Mentum Planet User Guide
77 78 78 79
Toimport multipleantennafiles
79
Downloading antenna patterns from the Antenna Server
80
Todownloadantennapatterns
80
O pening and vie wing ante nna patte rns
82
Toopen an antennapattern
82
To open an antenna pattern from the Project Explorer Editing antenna algorithm parame te rs
82 83
Toedit algorithmparameters
83
Editing antenna patte rns
85
To edit antenna patt erns
86
Printing ante nna patterns
89
To preview an antenna pattern
89
To print an antenna pattern
89
Adding a ntenna patte rns toaproje ct
90
To add a ntenna pattern files toaproject
90
To view or hide unassignedantennapatterns
90
To refresh patterns antenna
90
To rename ante nna patterns
91
To remove an antenna pattern from the Project Explorer
91
Grouping antenna patterns
92
To group patterns antenna
93
To ungroup anten na patterns
93
Using ante nna q uerie s
94
To create and ru n anew antennaquery
94
Chapter 5 ManagingSurve yData
96
Unde rstandingsurveys How survey data is organized in the Project Explorer Workflowforsurve ys
97 97 99
Mentum Planet User Guide v
C olle ctingsurve ydata
100
Addingsurve ys toaproje ct
101
Toaddsurveys totheproject
102
To import surveys
102
Tomodify theproperties ofasurvey
103
Addingsurve yhe ade rinformation To update survey header information using sector properties
105 105
Savingacopyofasurve y
106
To save a copy survey of a
106
Displaying s urve da yta
107
To view survey a in theMapwindow
107
To find survey data poi nts in theMapwindow
108
To vi ew survey data in tabularformat
108
To create a them atic mapofsurvey data
109
To modify display options for thematically mapped surveys
109
Viewing survey statistics
111
To view a survey histogram To view a surveydistribution clutter histogram
111 112
To view a survey regression analysis
113
Assigning surve ys
117
To assign a survey to sector a
117
To create a survey assignment file
117
To assign multiple surveysu sing an assignmentf ile
118
To view and updatesurvey assignments
119
To export a survey assignment file
119
To clear all survey assignments
120
Cr ea ting survey reports
121
To create survey assignment reports Modifying survey data
vi Mentum Planet User Guide
121 122
Toaveragesurvey data
122
Tofiltersurvey data
124
Tofiltersurvey databy selection
127
Tofiltersurvey databy polygon
128
To remove survey data points from the Map window
129
C ombining and comparing surve ys Tocombinesurveys
130 130
Tocomparetwosurveys
131
To compare survey a with anumeric grid
132
To compare a surveyw itha modeled prediction
133
Chapte r 6 Managing Te st Mobile Data
136
Unde rstanding test mobiledata
137
Input file r equirementsf ortestm obile data
137
Test mobiledatafileheader
137
Workflow for test mobile da ta
139
Importingte stmobiledata
140
To import test mobile data
140
Vie wing information about a test mobile dat a file
145
To view information about a test mobile data file
145
Viewing a nd locatingte stmobiledata
146
To view the test mobile data locations in a Map wi ndow
146
To findtestm obile data ina Mapwindow
147
To view test mobile data in tabularformat
147
Displaying test mobile data in a M apw indow
149
Understandingpointd isplays ettings
149
Automatic selection Understanding how display informa tion is organized To define map view settings for a test mobile data file
149 149 150
Mentum Planet User Guide vii
To define individualp ointd isplays ettings
153
To define point display settings for ranges of values
154
To display the test mobile data points in a Map window
156
To create a map view template for test mobile data
156
Vie w ing te st mobile data in graph format
158
Toviewt estm obiledataing raphf ormat To printt he data int he TestM obile Graph window
159 161
Allocating test mobile data to se ctors
162
Looking up sectors f or test mobile data
162
Allocating test mobile records to se ctors
162
To look up sectors for test mobile dataautomatically
163
To assign sectors to test mobile carrier nodes manually
165
To add a v irtual test mobile sector
165
To view or modify sector inf ormation
166
To allocate test mobile re cords tosectors
167
To view the test mobile records
168
To unassign sectors
168
To modify the display int heTest Mobiletreeview
168
Exporting te st mobile datatosurve ys
169
To export test mobiledatatosurveys
169
Chapter 7 Managing Scan R ece iverData
170
Understanding scan rece ived r ata
171
Inputf ile requirementsf or scanr eceiver data
171
Scan receiver data file h eader
171
Workflowforscanre ce ive rdata Importing scan re ce ived r ata To import scan data receiver Vie w ing information about a scan re ce ive r data file
viii Mentum Planet User Guide
173 174 174 179
To view information about a scan receiver data file
179
Vie w ingscanre ce iverdata
180
To view the scan receiver data locations in a Map window
180
To find scanr eceiver data ina Map window
181
To views canr eceiver data int abular format
181
Displaying scan re ceive r data in a Map w indow Understandingpointd isplays ettings
183 183
Automatic selection
183
Understanding how display information is organized
183
To define map view settings for a scan receiver d file ata
184
To define individual point display settings
187
To define point display settings for ra nges of va lues
188
To display the scan receiver data po ints in a Map window
190
To create a map view template for scan receiver data
190
Viewing scan receiver data in g raphformat
192
To view scan receiver data in graph fo rmat
193
To print the data in the Scan Receiver Graph window
195
Allocating scan receiver data to se ctors
196
Looking up sectors for scan receiver data
196
Allocating scan receiver reco rds tosectors
196
To look up sectors for scan receiver data automat ically
197
To assign sectors to scan receiver carrier nodes manually
199
To add a virtual sca n receiver sector
199
To view or modify sector information
200
To allocate scan receiver records to sectors
201
To view the scan receiver records
202
To unassign sectors
202
To modify the display in the Scan Receiver tree view
202
Exporting scan receiver data surto ve ys
203
Mentum Planet User Guide ix
Toexports canr eceiverdatatosurveys Chapte r 8 Managing Scanner Surve y Data Unde rstanding scanne r surve ydata Input file requirements for scanner survey receiver data Workflow for managing scanne r surve y data Importingscanne rsurve ydata
203 206 207 207 208 209
Toimport scannersurvey data
209
Exporting scanne r surve y data to surveys
211
Toexports cannersurveyd atatosurveys
211
Chapter 9 Gene rating Pre dictions Understanding path loss and s ignal strength pre dictions Path loss and signal stre ngthfile s
216 217 218
Path loss f iles
218
Signal strength files
218
Combinedsignal strength files Choosing a prediction mode
219 221
Modeled predictions
221
Merged predictions
221
Defining output se ttings
222
Advanced prediction layers
222
Todefineanalysis output settings
223
Generating pre dictions
224
To generate pre dictions
224
Vie w ing predictions from the Project Explore r
227
To view predictions forasector
227
Vie wing predictions fro m the V ie wme nu
228
Toviewp redictionsu singtheViewm enu
228
Displaying, filtering, andde le ting predictions
231
x Mentum Planet User Guide
To display, filter, and delete predictions
231
Chapter 10 Generating Signal Strength Predictions Between TwPooints 234 Unde rstanding point- to-point analyses
235
The Fresnel zone
235
Workflow for point-to-point analyse s Understanding the Point-to-Point Profile Tool dialog box
237 238
Ge ne rating point-to-point profile s
241
Togenerate apoint-to-pointp rofile
241
Understanding how to interpret a point-t o-point profile
245
What you see
245
What you can do
246
Viewing the height of clutter above the elevation profile To define clutter height values
247 247
To view clutter heights
247
Customizing the point-to-point profile graph window To customize the Point-to-Point profile graph window
248 248
To inspect individual points on a pro file Displayingre fle ctionpoints
249 250
To display reflection points Expo rting a point -to-point graph To exporta point-to-pointg rapha sa ni mage To export a point-to-pointg rapht o atextf ile Printing point-to-poing t raphs
250 252 252 252 253
Toprint apoint-to-point graph
253
Saving and opening point-to-point profile s To save a point-to-point profile
254 254
Toopen apoint-to-point profile
254
Mentum Planet User Guide xi
Chapte r 11 Ge ne rating P ropagation Mode l Analyses
256
Unde rstanding propagation mode l analyse s
257
Analysis results
257
Workf low for generating a propagation model analysis
259
De fininganalysis se ttings
260
Todefineanalysis settings
260
Ge ne rating a propagation mode l analysis
263
To generate a propagation model analysis from sectors
263
To generate a propagation model analysis from surveys
264
Vie w inganalysis re sults
265
To view analysis results
265
To view related s ectorinformation
266
Toview relatedsurvey information
267
To view related sector-bas ed propaga tion model information
268
To view related survey-based propagation model information
269
Chapter 12 M anagingTraffic Understanding traffm icaps
270 271
Using traffic maps
271
Conversion factors for input traff ic data
272
Traf fic weighting
273
Unde rstandingclutte rwe ighting Including vectors in clutter Workflow for cre ating and e diting a traffic map C re atingtrafficmaps To create a traffi c map
274 275 277 278 278
To create a tr afficm ap from a fixed subscriber table
279
C re ating traffic mapsf rom ne twork data
281
Best server coverage grid
xii Mentum Planet User Guide
281
On-the-flyb ests ervercoveragegrid
281
Sectorserviceprobabilities
281
Vie w ingtrafficmaps
282
Toview atraffic map
282
Adding traffic maps to the P roje ct Explore r
283
To add a trafficm ap to the ProjectE xplorer Modifyingtrafficmaps
283 284
C onvertingtrafficmaps
285
To convert a traffic map
285
Scaling maptraffic s
286
To scale a traffic mapby percentage
286
To scale a traffic map by offset
286
To scale a traffi c map using clutter scalingfactors Combining traffim c aps
287 289
To combine tr affic maps
289
Deleting traffim c aps
291
To delete a traffic map
291
Chapter 13 Wo rking With Interference Matrices
292
Understandinginte rfe re nce matrice s
293
Histograminterferencematrices
293
Histograminterferencealgorithms
294
Workflow for cre ating interfe re nce matrice s
295
Creating interfere ncematrice s
296
To create a histogram interferencematrix
296
Vie w inginterfe re nce matrice s
303
To view a histogram interfe rencematrix To view histogram interference matrixs ettings
303 304
Exporting aninte rfe re nce matrix
306
Mentum Planet User Guide xiii
Toexport an interferencematrix
306
De le tinginte rfe re ncematrice s
307
Todeleteinterferencematrices
307
Chapte r 14 Managing N e ighbor R e lationships
308
Unde rstandingne ighborplanning
309
Workflow for planning ne ighbor re lationships
311
C hoosingthe type of ne ighborplan
312
Best Serveralgorithm
312
Interference Matrix algorithm
313
Service Probabilities algorithm
313
Cre ating neighbor p lans To create a neighbor pla n
314 314
Adding ne ighbor plans to the Proje ct Explore r
321
To add a nei ghborplant otheProjectE xplorer
321
Viewing neighborre lationships
322
To view neighbor relationships in the Tabular Editor
322
To view neighborrelationships
323
Comparing ne ighbor plans
324
Tocompareneighborplans
324
Optimizing neighbor plans
326
To optimize the current neighborplan
326
Tooptimizeneighborplans Applying neighbo prlans To mer ge neighbor plan s Toreplaceneighborplans Deleting neighboprlans To delete a neig hbor plan Chapter 15 Op timiz ingN e tworkDe sign
xiv Mentum Planet User Guide
327 328 328 328 329 329 330
Unde rstanding ne twork optimiz ation
331
Betternetwork design
332
Lower cost
333
Be foreyou be gin
334
Workflow for ne twork optimiz ation
335
Unde rstanding optimiz ation in Me ntum P lane t Usingoptimization goals
336 337
Unde rstandingsitese le ction
340
O ptimizing the ne twork
341
To createan optimization profile
341
Tooptimizethenetwork
342
Creating optimization profiles
344
To create an optimizationp rofile for LTEg oals
344
To create an optimization profile with goals for di sparate technologies To create an optimization profile for cdma2000 goals Vie w ing site se le ction and optimiz ation results
347
348 352
To view site selection results
352
To view optimization results
352
Applying site selection and optimization change s To apply site selection changes Toapply optimization changes Chapte r 16 Planning Microwave Links Understanding microwave link planning
353 353 353 354 355
Microwave link planning objectives
355
Microwave data
356
Workflow for micro wavelinkplanning Defining microw ave settings
357 358
Mentum Planet User Guide xv
Todefinemicrowavesettings
358
Addingprofilesource s
359
Toaddprofilesources
359
C onfiguringuse requipme nt
360
Toconfigureradios
360
Toconfigurefeedercables C re atingfre que ncyplans
360 362
Tocreatefrequency plans
362
Understanding microwavelinks
363
AMSL layers
363
AGL layers
365
Link clearance
366
Antennas
366
Cr e ating and configuring microwave links To create alink micro wave
367 367
To configuremicrowavelinkp arameters
367
Importing and exporting microwave links import Tomicrowavelinks
369 369
To export microwave links
369
Creating a reflection pl aneanalysis
370
To create reflection plane analysis
370
Analyzing microwave links
372
To analyze link profiles Chapter 17 U sing theExte nsionManage r
372 374
Customizing Mentum Planet using the Extension M anager
375
To add an extension To uninstall an extension Tosavetheextension
xvi Mentum Planet User Guide
375 376 376
Toenableordisablean extension
376
Chapte r18 WorkingwithGrids
378
Ge ttinginformationabouta grid Toview agridlegend Touse the GridManagerInfo function TousetheGridInfotool TousetheRegion Infotool TousetheLineInfotool C ontouringagrid
379 379 380 380 381 381 383
Creatingcontoursf oranumericg rid
383
To define co ntourpolylines orregions
384
Creating contours for a classifiedgrid
385
To create contoursf or a classifiedgrid
385
Creati ng s moothgridcontours
387
How smooth gridcontours arecreated Tocreatesmooth gridcontours Creating slope and as pe cg t rids To create a slope and as pect grid
387 390 393 393
Workingwithare agrids
395
To create an area g rid
395
To add an a rea grid Torenamean areagrid To view an area grid To delete an area grid Analyz ingvisibilityonagrid Point-to-Point Visibility function To determine point-to-point visibility Viewshedfunction
396 396 396 397 398 398 398 400
Mentum Planet User Guide xvii
To perform a single-pointv iewshed analysis
401
To perform a multi-pointv iewshed analysis
402
Chapte r 19 Ge ne rating C ove rage R eports
404
P roducingcove ragemapre ports
405
Tocreateaprint layout To add frame a
405 406
Tochangetheborderofaframe
407
Toopen agraphic file
407
Cre ating and printing lege nds
408
Tocreateandprint agridlegend
408
To create and p rint a thematic maplegend
409
Producing FCrCe ports
410
ServiceAreaBoundary (SAB) formula
411
UnderstandingFCC tableformats To create FC C contours
411 412
To define override valuesf or 32d Bus ervices
414
To use the FCC Point tool
416
To save FCC contour tables
418
Toexport an FCC report
419
Chapter 20 W orkingtheTabularEditor
420
Working with theTabularEditor
421
To edit sites, f lags, or link configurations using the Ta bularEditor Chapter 21 Importin an gdExportingData
421 424
Importing, replacing, and exporting project dat a
425
Importing data
426
Replacing data Exporting data
xviii Mentum Planet User Guide
426 427
Toexport project data
427
Toimport project data
429
Im porting network data into Mentum Planet projects
432
Bindingnetwork data
432
Viewingtheresults ofdatabinding
432
Toimport network data ImportingCe llPlanne rproje cts
432 437
Toimport aCellPlannerproject
437
Appendix A Survey to numeric grid calculations
438
Survey to numeric grid calculations
439
Mean
439
STD (standard deviation)
439
RMS (root-mean-square)
440
Confidence Level
440
Correlation factor
442
Appendix B Propagation Model Analysis Equa tions
444
Understanding propagation model analysis equations
445
Survey MeanE rrorfromPrediction( dB) Standard Deviation ofErrors
445 446
Correlation SimplifiedPathloss Free space pathloss Quality (%) Confidence
447 448 448 449 450
Mentum Planet User Guide xix
Chapter 1 Introd uction This User Guide provides an overview of the full life cycle of a wireless network, and includes information on the tools and procedures that are common to all networ k technologies. Many procedures, for example network analyses, are dependent on the technology bein g used, and are not included in this User Guide. For more information on technology-specific procedu res, see the appropriate User Guide. This chapter covers the following topics:
Fe ature s ofMentumP lane t Usingthis docume ntation Organiz ationofthisu se rguide
2 5 9
Mentum Planet User Guide 1
Chapter 1
Features of Mentum Planet Mentum Planet provides you with all the tools you need to accurately design, analyze, and optimize wireless networks. You can add extensions and en able additional technologies to support the planning functions that you require. Below is a list of some of the main features of M entum Planet. This list is not comprehensive. For a detailed featu re list, go to the Mentum web site at http://www.mentum.com.
Project Explorer The Project Explorer organizes all components of a project into a hierarchical structure, enabling you to easily manage all project-related data includ ing sites, project inf ormation, network analyses, network data , and surveys. You can sort components such as sites and antenna patterns by their characteristics and manage support documents such as c ensus tract data, capacity planning information, or RF design review do cuments. Shortcut menus give you quick access to a wide variety of commands.
Site Editor The Site Editor brings together all the parameters you need to specify when defining base station techn ologies, sites, and sector s. This includes the link configuration, the implementation settings as well as general site and sector settings.
Traffic Map Generator Using the Traffic Map Generator, you can c reate traffic maps based on various sources of data, including market information, demographics, vehicular traffic, and switch statistics. You can combine this inform ation with clutter infor mation for your coverage area for an even more accurate assessment of traffic loading for your wireless network. You can also sc ale traffic maps to better meet your requ irements.
Interference Matrix Generator The Interference Matrix Generator analyzes the potential for co-channel and adjacent-channel interference in your wireless network. If required, you can include traffic map information in the interference matrix c alculations. Interference matrices
2 Mentum Planet User Guide
Introduction
are required input for the Neighbor List Generator and the Automatic Frequency Preamble and Perm Base Planning tool.
Neighbor Plan Generator You can use the Neighb or Plan Generator to create, view, edit, and compare neighbor lists for single-technolog y networks and for multi-technology networks. Neighbor candetermi be based cell adjacency or interferen ce. Multiple user-defi nedplans criteria neon neighbor selec tion. You can also import and export neighbor plans.
Network Data Import Wizard You can import switch statist ics for use in traffic maps, interference matrices, neighbor lists, and other Mentum Plan et analysis tools. Performance-related data you can import includes dropped call rates, blocked call rates, and traffic levels. The Network Data tool can also produce a thematically map ped display of the imported data by sector.
Survey Data tool Using the Survey Data node in the Project Explor er, you can import, manage, and visualize survey data.
Subscriber Settings The Subscriber Settings dialog box contains all the parameters you need to define the c haracteristics of your network subscribers including the mobile equipment and services they use as well as the Quality of Service thresholds.
Data Manager The Data Manager enables you to store data centrally and manage projects more efficiently, thus facilitating pr oject c ollaboration and data s haring.
Mentum Planet User Guide 3
Chapter 1
Microwave Links You can visualize microwave transmission links within the context of your Mentum Planet projects and perform basic microwave planning tasks when designing your wireless network. Using the shortcut menus that are accessible within the Microwave category in the Project Explorer, you can create microwave links between sites by selec ting the sites in the Project Explorer Sites category and using the shortcut commands and you can view links in the Map window.
MapInfo Professional Mentum Planet includes a full version of MapIn fo Professional, an industry standard mapping tool that gives you access to a full suite of raster and vector analysis tools, cartographic-quality tools, and advanced them atic mapping capabilities. For a list of new features in MapInfo 10.5, see the MapInfo Professional User Guide located in the mapinfo folder within the Mentum Planet installation folder.
4 Mentum Planet User Guide
Introduction
Using this documentation Before using this documen tation, you should be familiar with the W indows environment. It is as sumed that you are using the standar d Windows desktop, and that you know h ow to acce ss ToolTips and shor tcut menus, move and copy objects, select multiple obj ects using the Shift or Ctrl key, resize dialog b oxes, expand and collap se folder trees. It is also assumed that you are famili ar with the basic functions of MapInfo Professional Ò. MapInfo Professional functions are not documented in this Us er Guide. For information about MapIn fo Professional, see the MapInfo online Help and MapInfo Professional User Guide. You can access additional MapInfo user documentation from the Pitney Bowes Business Insight website at http://www.pbinsight.com/support/product-documentation. All product information is av ailable through the online Help. You access online Help using the Help menu or context-sensitive Help from within a dialog box by pressing the F1 key. If you want to view the online Help for a specific panel or tab, click in a field or list box to activate the panel or tab before you press the F1 key. The following sections describe the structure of the online Help.
User documentation updates User documentation is continually evolving to address feedback or introduce improvements. You can download the latest user documentation from the Customer Care Product Downloads page where it is available as a separate download from the software.
Online Help From the Help menu, you can access online Help for Mentum Planet software and for MapInfo Professional. This section desc ribes the structure of the Mentum Planet online Help. The online Help provides extensive help on all aspects of software use. It provides n
n
help on all dialog boxes procedures for using the software
Mentum Planet User Guide 5
Chapter 1
n
an extensive Mentum Pla net documentation library in PDF format
The following sections provide details about the resources available through the online Help.
Resource Roadmap When you first use the online Help , start with the Resource Roadmap. It describes the types of resources available in the online Help and explains how best to use them. It includes a step-by-step guide that walks you throug h the available resources.
Knowledge Base You can access the Knowledge Base maintained by the Customer Care group by clicking the Knowledge Base button on the online Help toolbar or by choosing the Knowledge Base c ommand from the Help menu. The Knowledge Base contains current information on Mentum products such as How To procedures as well as solutions to issues.
Printing You have two basic options for printing documents: n
n
If you want a good quality pr int of a single procedure or section, you can print from the Help window. Click Print in the Help window. If you want a higher quality print of a complete User Guid e, use Adobe Reader to print the s upplied print-ready PDF file contained in the Mentum Planet documentation library. Open the PDF file and chooseF ile Print .
Library Search You can perform a full-text search on all PDF files contained in the Mentu m Planet documentation library if you are using a v ersion of Adobe Reader that supports fulltext searches. The PDF files are located in the Mentum\Planet\Help\User G uides folder. You can also perform a search on all online Help topics by clicking the Search tab in the Help window. Type a keyword, and click List Topi cs to display all Help topi cs that contain the keyword. The online Help dup licates the information found in the User
6 Mentum Planet User Guide
Introduction
Guide PDF files in order to provide more complete results. It does not duplicate the information in the Release Notes , or Glossary.
“What’s This?” Help “What’s This?” Help provides detailed explanations of all dialog boxes.
User Guides All User Guides for Mentum Planet software is easily accessible as part of the online Help.
Documentation library Mentum Planet comes with an exte nsive library of U ser Guides in PDF format. You can access PDF versions of the user g uides by navigating to the Help/User Guides folder within the Mentum Planet installation fold er or by c hoosing the Guides command from the Mentum Planet Help menu. Additional documents, including Application Notes and Techni cal Notes, are available at http://www.mentum.com.
Notational conventions This section describes the textual conventions and icons used throughout this documentation.
Textual conventions Special text formats are used to highlight different types of information. The following table describes the special text conventions used in this document. Bold text is used in procedure steps to identify a user interface element such as a dialog box, menu item, or button. bold text For example: In thethe Select Interpolation dialog box, choose Inverse Distance Method Weighting option, and click Next.
courier text
Courier text is used in procedur es to identify text that a user must type.For example: In the File
Mentum Planet User Guide 7
Chapter 1
Name box, type Elevation.grd .
bright blue text
Bright blue text is used to identify a link to another section of the docum ent. Click the link to view the section. Menu arrows are used in procedures to identify a sequence of menu items that you must follow. For example, if a step reads “Ch ooseF ile you would click File and then click Open.
Open ,”
For example, if a menu item chang es depending on the chosen unit of measur ement, the menu structure would appear asDisplay .
8 Mentum Planet User Guide
Introduction
Organization of this user guide This user guide is organized according to the workflow that you would typically follow to model and analyze a network and contains detailed information related to all of the main steps in the wor kflow. Secondary or optional steps in the workflow include referen ces to manuals contained in the Mentum Planet documentation library. Each chapter in this guide provides details about how to perform a step in the planning process and explains how it relates to the other steps. Before you begin, you should read the “Understand ing...” sections in each c hapter for an overview of the planning process.
Mentum Planet User Guide 9
Chapter 2 Creating Generic Projects You can create a generic project in Mentum Pl anet. A generic project is technology-agnostic so you do not need a technology-related license. However, using a generic project, you can only use some of the f unctionality available in Mentum Planet. For information on creating a tec hnology-specific project, see the User Guide for the technology you are using. This chapter covers the following topics:
Unde rstanding ge ne ricproje cts
12
Cre atingage ne ricproje ct
14
Ope ningandclosingproje cts
18
Saving projects R e storingproje cts
19 20
Mentum Planet User Guide 11
Chapter 2
Understanding generic projects Generic projects are a convenient way to manage candidate sites where there is no base station assigned to the site and for which there is no detailed network information available. With gener ic projects, you can: n
n
n
n
configure and place sites. See “Working with Sites and Sectors”. generate predictions. See “Generating Predictions”. use the Tabular Editor to modify data. See “ Using the Tabu lar Editor”. export project data to Excel or Comma Separates Values (.csv) files. See "Importing and Exporting Data”.
In addition, using other Mentum Planet tools, you can: n
n
n
n
create sector qu eries. See “Using queries to identify sectors”. create sector disp lay schemes. See “Customizing sector symbols for multiple sites ”. create neighbor lists. See “Managing Neighbor Relationships”. create interference matrices. See “Working with Interference Matrices”.
A generic project, like a technology-specifi c project, contains and organizes all of the information pertaining to a particular w ireless network. At a minimum, a project is created from a heights file (i.e., a Digital Elevation Model) although you can also include clutter information (i.e., land use) in a project. A generic project contains: n
digital elevation models
n
project clutter information
n
clutter information for specific environments
n
propagation models
n
site locations
12 Mentum Planet User Guide
Creating Generic Projects
n
sector equipment, including antennas
n
groups
n
flags
n
any documents you want to attach to the pr oject
A project also contains the results of predictions made on the basis of this information.
NOTE: For information on technology-specific projects, see the user guide for the technology you are using. User Guides are available in the Help folder within the Mentum Planet installation folder.
NOTE: You can rename a generic technology to better suit y our requirements. For example, in the Network Setting s dialog box, on the Gener al tab, you change the technology name from Generic to DVB-H.
Mentum Planet User Guide 13
Chapter 2
Creating a generic project The Project Wizard leads you through the process of creating a project. In order to streamline design wor k, you can specify that the Wizard automati cally displays when you start Mentum Planet. If you want Mentum Plan et t o automatically open the last project, instead of the Project Wizard, in the Startup Options sect ion of the User Preferences dialog box, choose the Open Most Recent Project option. You can use remote project folders to store and access Mentum Planet project data. For example, you can use shared project folders for the follo wing types of proj ect files to conserve disk space on your workstation: n
pathloss files
n
signal (field) strength files
n
prediction view files
By default, these files are saved in the local pr oject folder. If you use shared project folders, the project files are stored in the shar ed folders, instead of the local project folder. The shared folders must have read/write acces s permissions for all Mentum Planet users accessing the shared folders. If you are using shared folders and do not enable the corresponding check box in the Sharing section of the Advanced Options tab in the Project Settings dialog box, the shared path is not stored in Data Man ager when you check in the project. For any Data Manager users who perfor m a Get on the project, all data will be stored within their local project folder. When you creat e a project, you can choose to use a workspace to save your map window settings, although this is not requ ired. You can also choose the c oordinate system. For additional information about projection s, see “Appendix B, “Elements of a Coordinate System” in the MapInfo Professional User Guide.
To create a generic project 1
Start Mentum Planet.
14 Mentum Planet User Guide
Creating Generic Projects
By default, the Project Wizard op ens when you star t Mentum Planet. To use the wizard at any other time, choose File ► New Project.
2
On each page of the Wizard, provide the required information and click Next.
3
On the Select Your Project Technologies page, in the Available list, choose Generic . On the Choose Default Settings for Each Enabl ed Technology page, the Generic.xls file c ontaining default project s ettings is displayed. Default settings are saved in the \Global\Technologies folder. If you want to c ustomize the default settings to use each time a new pr oject is created, you can modify the Generic.xls file.
4 5
Click Next. On the Choose Geodata That Covers All Of Your Site Locations page, click the Browse button and navigate to where the project geodata is saved. The folder you define for geodata can be located within the project folder although it doesn’t have to be. In or der to save disk s pace, the geodata folder can be located on a server or in a common location where multiple users can access it. At a minimum, it must, however,
Mentum Planet User Guide 15
Chapter 2
contain a Heights folder and a Clutter fold er. The Heights folder mu st c ontain the primary elevation file but the Clutter folder can be empty.
6 Click Next. 7 Click Finish. The project opens in a Map window.
To view or edit project settings 1
ChooseEdit
Project Sett ings .
The Project Settings dialog box opens.
2
Modify project settings as required.
NOTE: When you create a project, default propagation model (.pmf) files and default antenna (.paf) files are copied to the project folder. TIP: To open the Project Settings di alog box once a project is open, choose Edit Project Setting s, or click the Project Settings button on th e Network toolbar.
TIP: To make a copy of an existing project, close the existing pr oject and copy the contents of its project folder to a new project folder. It is not recommended that you create the new project folder as a s ubfolder of the existing pr oject folder. In the new
16 Mentum Planet User Guide
Creating Generic Projects
project folder, you can delete large fold ers (e.g., Bin, SignalStrength, and PredictionView) or you can elect not to copy them because Mentum Planet automatically recreates these folders. Once your new project folder is populated, open it in Mentum Planet and rename it using Edit Project Settings
Name. Finally, save, close, and re-open the renamed project.
CAUTION: Never save projects in t he Mentum Planet installation f older.
Mentum Planet User Guide 17
Chapter 2
Opening and closing projects You must close an open project before opening a new one. If you want Mentum Planet to automatically open th e last project, choose the Open Most Recent Project option on the General panel in the User Preferences dialog box. If you do not want the last project to open, choose the None option.
To open a project 1
Do one of the following: n
n
n
2
Double-click the Mentum Plan et (.planet) proj ect file to start Mentum Planet and open the project. In Mentum Planet, choose Fi le
Open Projec t and go to Step 2.
In Mentum Planet, choose Fi le Rec ent Project s . The path to the project is displayed in the Mentum Planet taskbar at the bottom of the application window .
In the Open dialog box, locate the project you want to open, and click Open. The project opens in a Map window.
TIP: To view two projects s ide-by-side, you can open mu ltiple instances of Mentu m Planet on your workstation.
TIP: Create a shortcut to your Men tum Planet project (.planet) file to quickly open projects that you use often.
18 Mentum Planet User Guide
Creating Generic Projects
Saving projects You can save proj ect data at any time withou t closing a project. It is recommended that you save your project periodically in order to avoid the loss of data in the event of a network or system fail ure. You can also save a named backup of your project. This can be useful if you w ant to save the project at various stages in the network development.
To save a project n
ChooseFi le
Sav e Projec t .
The project is saved in the project folder.
To back up a project 1 2
ChooseFi le
Back Up Projec t .
In the Backup Project dialog box, in the Name box, type a name for the folder where the data will be saved and click OK. Project data is saved in the named folder within the Backup folder.
Mentum Planet User Guide 19
Chapter 2
Restoring projects Each time you open or save a project, a copy of the project is saved in the Backup folder within the project folder. When a project has been terminated abn ormally, you can choose to restore the last opened version of the project or the last saved version of the project. Project files can only be restored to the srcinal project folder. Do not open a .planet file save d in the Backup folder. Backup .planet files should only be opened from the Restore Project Files dialog box.
To restore a project 1 2
Start Mentum Planet. ChooseFi le
Res tore .
The Restore Project Files dialog box opens.
3
Click the Browse button next to the Restore Project Files From box and navigate to the .planet file saved in the Backup folder within the project folder, and then click OK.
4
Click the Browse button next to the Restore Project Files To box and navigate to the srcinal folder where project files were s aved, and then click OK. The backup files are copied to the project folder.
20 Mentum Planet User Guide
Chapter 3 Working With Si tes And Se ctors After you defi ne site and sector pr operties, you can place your sites. If you are using the same site configuration for many sites, you can save a site template, which simplifies the process of site placement. This chapter covers additional features related to the configuration and placement of sites. See the appropriate User Guide for th e tec hnology you are using for procedures relating to the main workflow. This chapter covers the following topics:
Displaying and formatting site labe ls
22
Choosing site s
24
Grouping site s
26
Finding and selecting sites and sectors in the Map window Using que riest o ide ntify sectors
28 30
Workingw ithsite s
34
Using se ctorplace me nttools
38
Working with sector groups
41
Editingse ctorgroups
43
Working with flags
45
Editing fla co gn s dain tid ons
49
Modifying sector symbols for individual site s Customizing sector symbols for multiple site s
51 52
Adding custom data Optimiz ingasinglesite
60 62
Mentum Planet User Guide 21
Chapter 3
Displaying and formatting site labels You can display and format site labels in order to improve the readability of a map.
To display site labels n
In the Project Explorer , in the Windows categor y, expand the Map Windows node, right-click the active site file and choose Auto Label if there is not already a check mark indicating the feature is turned on.
To hide site labels n
In the Project Explorer , in the Windows categor y, expand the Map Windows node, right-click the active site file and choose Auto Label to remove the check mark.
To format site labels 1
Right-click in the Map window and choose Layer Control. The Layer Control dialog box opens.
2
From the list of layers, choose your site file and click the Layer Properties button at the top of the dialog box. The Label Properties dialog box opens.
3
On the Label Display tab, s pecify the following: n
the information to include in the label
n
how the labels app ear in the Map window (e.g., font type and size)
n
the placement of the lab els in the Map win dow Click the Help button for more information on the Label Display tab.
4
On the Labeling Rules tab, specify the following:
22 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Sites And Sectors
n
n
whether labels are visible in the map window and condi tions for zoom ranges. how labels are displayed u nder exceptional cond itions. For example, allowing duplicate text is useful if you wan t to display sector labels such as technology where more than one site would have the same label. Note that the Label Partial Objects parameter does not apply to labels for sites or other point objects.
5
In the Layer Properties dialog box, click OK.
6
In the Layer Control dialog box, ensure that the Automatic Labels icon is enabled for your site file.
7
In the Layer Control dialog box, click OK.
You can create complex labels that combine several pieces of information by choosing Expression from the Label With list in the Layer Properties dialog box. For information on how to create t he expression you need, press the F1 key.
Mentum Planet User Guide 23
Chapter 3
Choosing sites There are several methods available in Men tum Planet for choosin g sites. You can: n
choose sites and sectors from the Pr oject Explorer.
n
use the s hortcut commands from the Project Explor er.
n
use the Sel ect, Marquee, Radius, or Polygon Select tools on th e Main toolbar.
n
use the Select All From S ite Table button on th e Site toolbar to select all sites or the Unselect All button from the Main toolbar to unselect all sites.
When you choo se a site usin g the Select tool, on ly one sector is selected . If you wan t to choose all of the sectors in a site, you must choose the sectors using the Marquee, Radius, or Polygon Select tools or use the Select in Map windo w command from the Project Explorer.
To choose sites and sectors from the Project Explorer The recommended method for choosing sites and sectors is using the Project Explorer.
1
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites categor y, expand the Sites node.
2
Do one of the following: n
n
n
n
To choose a site, click on the site no de. To choose multiple sites, press the Ctrl key and click on multiple sites. To choose a sector, expand the site no de and click a sector. To choose multiple sectors, expand the sites nod e, press the Ctr l key and click on multiple sectors.
24 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Sites And Sectors
To choose sites and sectors using the Sele ct tools You can also use the Select tools on the Main toolbar to choose sites and sectors. You can also use the Select All in Site Table button and the Find Site button on the Site toolbar. When more than one layer is displayed in a Map wind ow, you can only make selections using the Select tools on objects that are on the uppermost layer. Mentum Planet automatically sets the project defaults so that the site table and editable map layers added to the Ma p window are selectable. Therefore, if you have opened several m ap layers, use the Layer Control to make these layers unselectable in order to facilitate the selection process or ensure the site table is the uppermost selectable layer. You can also view currently selected objects in a Browser window to ensure that the correct objects (sites and sectors) are chosen. Choose Window New Browser Window and choose Selection in the Browser Table dialog box.
1
Click any of the following buttons on the Main toolbar and then click in the Map window or drag the mouse pointer to select multiple sites : n
Select tool
n
Polygon Select tool
n
Marquee Select tool
Mentum Planet User Guide 25
Chapter 3
Grouping sites By grouping sites, you can organize how sites are displayed in the Project Explorer . This makes it easier to work with sites. You can group sites by the followin g properties: n
antenna pattern
n
propagation model
n
technology
To group s ites by properties in the Project Explorer You can quickly view which sites have specific properties using the Group By option in the Project Explo rer. For example, if you want to view sites organized accord ing to antenna pattern, you can choose the Antenn a Pattern option. This creates nodes under the Sites node for each antenn a pattern in the proj ect, and groups the sites according to which pattern they use. n
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, right-click Sites, choose Group By, and then choose the property by which you want the sites grouped.
To copy grouped sites in the Pro ject Explorer You can quickly copy all sectors from a grouped sites node to a new group in the Project Explorer. Only those sec tors with the grouped by property will be copied. In Figure 3.1, sites are grouped by Antenna type. To add all sectors assigned the 60 _ degree antenna, you can drag the 60_degree node onto the Sixty_degrees node under the Local group node. Sectors ass igned an antenna other than 60 _degree will not be copied to the group.
26 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Sites And Sectors
Figure 3.1: Example of s ites grouped by Antenna
1
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, right-click Sites, choose Group By, and then choose the property by which you want the sites grouped.
2
Right-click the grouped by node that you want to copy and choose Copy .
3
Right-click the group to which you want to add the copied sectors and choose Paste .
You can also drag the grouped sites to the new group.
To ungroup sites in the Pro ject Explorer n
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, right-click Sites and choose Group By None .
Mentum Planet User Guide 27
Chapter 3
Finding and selecting sites and sectors in the Map window Mentum Planet provides many methods for finding and selecting sites and sectors in the Map window. The Locate command is useful if you have many sites in your project and you want to select one particular site and center it in the Map window or if you have co-located sectors in your project and you want to select a co-located sector. The Select in Map Window command enables you to choose s everal sites or sectors in the Project Explorer and high light them in the Map window.
To find a site in the Map window n
Do one of the follow ing: n
n
In the Site Editor, click Locate . In the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, right-click the site and choose Locate.
The site is selected and centered in the Map window.
To find a sector in the Map window n
Do one of the follow ing: n
n
In the Site Editor, in the tr ee view, choose a sector and cli ck Locate . In the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, expand a site node, right-click a sector , and choose Locate.
The sector is selected and centered in the Map window.
To find and display a site with user-selected zoom 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, right-click Sites and choose Find Site.
2
In the Find Site dialog box, do one of the following: n
Enable the Select From List check box and, in the Find list, choose
n
Type the site ID in the Find box.
the site you want to find.
3
In the Zoom Width box, define the width of the map view.
28 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Sites And Sectors
4
Click Find to display your chosen site.
NOTE: You can also choose Edit Find Site dialog box.
Find Site from the main menu to open the
To select a site or sector in the Map window n
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, do one of th e following: n
n
Right-click the Si tes node, select a site, and ch oose Select In Map Window . Expand a site node, select a sector, and choose Select In Map Window .
At the site level, all the sector s will be selected in th e Map window. At the sector level, the chosen sector will be selected in the M ap window. NOTE: Due to a MapInfo limitation, sites that consist of an even numb er of sectors do not appear to be selected in the Map wind ow. The workaround is to select a sector in stead of a site.
TIP: You can select multiple sites or sectors in the Project Explorer b y pressing the Ctrl key and selecting multiple sites or sectors. When you choose Select in Map Wind ow, the chosen sites or sectors will be high lighted.
Mentum Planet User Guide 29
Chapter 3
Using queries to identify sectors You can create queri es to identify sectors based on a defined criter ia. This can be very usef ul, for example, when you want to: n
n
n
n
identify specific s ectors in the Map window in or der to visualize sectors within the context of analysis layer results view a selecti on of sites view a selection of sites based on a certain criter ia in order to evaluate perform ance and modify s ite settings select s pecific sectors within a lar ge project based on a defined criteria
n
modify site and sector parameters for a specific group
n
export site and sector data for sectors that meet a defined criter ia
Queries can be local or, if you are working in a collaborative work environment, shared using Data Manager.
Figure 3.2: Sector Query Editor dialo g box.
30 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Sites And Sectors
TIP: To identify cdma2 000 sectors that are within the Toronto regi on that use Band Class 0A, you could create the query: [Sector Technology]='cdma2000' And [Sectors.Band Name]='Class_0A' And [Sectors.Flag: Region] Contains 'Toronto'.
To use queries to identify sectors 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, right-click Queries and do one of the following: n
n
ChooseNe w
Local to create a local project query.
ChooseNe w Shared to create a shared query that can be shared with others using Data Manager.
2
In the Add New Local/Shared Query dialog box, type a descriptive name for the query and click OK.
3
In the Project Explorer , right-click the newly created query and choose Edit. The Sector Query Editor opens.
Mentum Planet User Guide 31
Chapter 3
4
In the Query Clauses section, choose the elements of the qu ery from the following lists: n
n
Group—displays a parenthesis that encompasses those clauses that are grouped. And/Or—displays chosen conditio n. Choose “And” when all clauses must be satisfied . For example, in the query, [Sectors.Propgation Model]=’default_PlanetGeneralModel.pmf’ And s ites t hat are [Sectors.Technology]=’cdma2000”, only those designated as cdma2000 and that use the default Planet General Model will be chosen. Choose “Or” when onl y one clause need be met. For example, in the query, [Sectors.Propgation Model]=’default_PlanetGeneralModel.pmf’ Or [Sectors.Technology]=’cdma2000”, a site that is defined as cdma2000 but uses the Predict propagation model would satisfy the query requirements.
n
n
n
n
5
Field —displays the sector parameters associated with the chosen category. Operator—displays available operators. Value—displays the value that m ust be satisfied. Click the Browse (...) button to see available values.
To modify the query, click any of the following buttons: n
Add—to add a new row to the Query Clauses table.
n
Delete —to remove the selected row from the Query Clauses table.
n
n
6
Category —displays the sector category including Sectors, Antennas, and technology.
Group—to group the selected clauses. When clauses are grou ped, both conditions must be met first. A red bracket in the second column encompasses the clauses in the group. Ungroup—to ungroup the selected clauses.
Once you have defined your query, from the View Result In list, choose one of the following options:
32 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Sites And Sectors
n
n
n
7
Report Previewer—to open query results in the Report Preview dialog box from where you can export data to Excel for further analysis. Tabular Editor—to open the Tabular Editor where you can modify data. Map—to display results in the Map w indow. A new map layer called QueriesMap is added to the Windows category of the Project Explorer.
To generate query results, click Run Query. The number of sectors that satisfy query requirements is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the Sector Query Editor.
8
To create a new local group that contains sectors that satisfy query conditions, click Create Group and, in the Add New Local Group dialog box, type a name for the group, then click OK.
NOTE: To calculate the numb er of sites and sectors that s atisfy each query, from the Q ueries node in the Project Explorer, right-click and choose Update Count. Every individual query in the Project Explorer is followed by (a/b) where a is the number of sites and b is the number of sectors that satisfy the query.
TIP: You can quickly create new queries by righ t-clicking an existing quer y and choosing Create Copy.
Mentum Planet User Guide 33
Chapter 3
Working with sites The Project Explorer provides easy access to functions that help you manage your sites. You can n
display information about a site.
n
copy a site or sector into a grou p.
n
n
delete a site. swap site parameters.
To display information about a site n
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites categor y, right-click the s ite and choose Edit.
The Site Editor opens. TIP: You can also double-click on a site to open the Site Edito r.
To copy a site or sector into a group You can quickly add sites or sectors to a group in the Project Explorer using the Copy and Paste commands.
1
In the Project Explorer , expand the Sites node, right-click the sites or sectors you want to copy into a gr oup, and choose Copy .
2
Expand the Groups node.
3
Right-click the group to which you want to add the sites or sectors, and choose Paste. The selected sites are added to the group or the selected sectors are added to the group under the srcin al s ite name.
NOTE: To add sit es or sectors to a group, you can also dr ag sites or sectors ont o a group under the Groups node.
34 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Sites And Sectors
To clone a sector at a site You can quickly clone a sector to create a copy of an existing sector at a site. All sector settings, carrier assignments, and base station link config uration parameters are copied to the new sector.
1
In the Project Explorer , expand the Sites node.
2
Right-click the sector u pon which you want the new sector based and choose Clone.
3
In the Clone Sector dialog box, in the New Sector Name box, type a name for the sector.
4
Click OK. The new sector is added to the same site as the srcinal sector.
To swap site and sector parameters n
In the Project Explorer , right-click the two sites for which you want site and sector parameters swapped and choose Swap Sites.
All site and sector parameters will be swapped (i.e., the site and sector parameters for Site A will be copied to Site B and vice-versa) NOTE: Groups, flags, and assigned repeaters are not swapped.
To rename a site 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, right-click the site and choose Rename.
2
Type a new name for the site and press ENTER.
3
In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to acknowledg e that existing predictions will be deleted.
Mentum Planet User Guide 35
Chapter 3
To refresh the sites list n
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, right-click Sites and choose Refresh.
The sites list is ordered alphabetically or numer ically, depending on the site ID.
To delete sites f rom the Project Explorer n
Do one of the follow ing: n
n
To delete one site, i n the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, right-click a site, choose Delete , and click Ye s to confirm t he deletion. To delete multiple sites, in the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, choose a s ite and holding-down the Ctrl key, choose the other sites you want to delete. Right-click and choose Delete , and click Ye s to confirm the deletion.
To delete sites from the Map window n
Do one of the follow ing: n
n
To delete one site, in th e Map window, choose the site, rig htclick and choose Delete , and then click Delete to confirm the deletion. To delete multiple sites, in the Map window, use the selecti on tools to choose the sites you want to delete, and then rightclick and choose Delete . In the Delete dialog box, click Delete for each site you want to delete.
To change the antenna for a sector Each sector assigned to a site must have a valid antenna pattern associated with it in order to generate predictions. Mentum Planet includes s ome default antenn a patterns, but you can add antenna patterns to your project as required. See “To add antenna pattern files to a project” .
1
Do one of the fo llowing:
36 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Sites And Sectors
n
n
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites categor y, right-click a site and choose Edit. Click the Edit Site button on the Site toolbar and choose a site in the Map window.
2
In the Site Editor , in the tree view, choose the sector you wan t to modify.
3
Click the Link tab.
4
From the Antenna list, choose the antenna you want to use with the sector. Only antennas that are displayed in the Antennas node are available.
5
If you are using a smart or MIMO antenna, from the Antenna Algorithm list, choose the algorithm you want to associate with the antenna.
6
Click Apply to apply the changes.
7
Click Close to close the Site Editor . Antenna patterns are organized in the Project Data category of the Project Explorer. The icons of antenna pattern s that have been assigned to a se ctor are displayed in color. The icons of antenn a patterns that have not been assigned to sectors, but are located in the An tennas folder of the project, are displayed in gr ay.
Mentum Planet User Guide 37
Chapter 3
Using sector placement tools The Grid Analysis toolbar includes tools that will help you with the placement of sectors and the positioning of directional antennas. n
n
n
Find Maximum Point tool—finds the highest point in a region. This is an aid to finding good locations for sites. Angle From Line tool—measures the direction of a line relative to true north. This can help in the placement of a directional anten na to serve a section of highway. Draw Angle tool—draws a line at a specified direction wi th respect to true north.
To use the Find Maximum P oint tool 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Windows category, right-click the Cosmetic layer for the Map window and choose Editable if the check box is not already enabled.
2
If the Grid Analysis and Drawing toolbars are not visible, choose View Toolbars , enable the Grid Analysis and Drawing check
3
If the Map window does not contain a suitable polygon object, such as a county or census district, click the Polygon button on the Drawing toolbar, and draw a polygon enclosing the area in whi ch you want to find the highest point.
4
On the Grid Analysis toolbar, click the Find Maximum Point button and choose the polygon in the Map window.
boxes in the Show column, and click OK.
A point object is generated on the cosmetic layer, showing the point of high est elevation within the polygon. To obtain the location coordi nates, double-click on the point object. NOTE: If you drew the polygon, select it in the Map window, press the DELETE key to remove it, and make the location of the highest point more visible.
38 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Sites And Sectors
NOTE: To delete the point object, choose the object in the Map window, and press the DELETE key to remove it.
To use the Angle From Line tool 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Windows category, right-click the Cosmetic layer for the Map window and choose Editable if the check box is not already enabled.
2
If the Grid Analysis and Drawing toolbars are not visible, chooseView Toolbars , enable the Grid Analysis and Drawing check boxes in the Show column, and click OK.
3
If the Map window does not contain a suitable line object, such as a road, click the Line button on the Drawing toolbar, and draw the line for which you want to measure the direction.
4
On the Grid Analysis toolbar, click the Angle From Line button, and choose the line in the Map windo w. A label is added to the Map window showing the angle of the line with respect to true north.
NOTE: To delete the label, in the Windows category of the Pr oject Explorer, expand the Windows node, and choose the cosmetic layer. Right-click and choose Clear Objects.
To use the Draw Angle tool 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Windows category, right-click the Cosmetic layer for the Map window and choose Editable if the check box is not already enabled.
2
If the Grid Analysis toolbar is not visibl e, choose View Toolbars, enable the Grid Analysis check box in the Show
3
On the Grid Analysis toolbar, click the Draw Angle button, and then click anywhere in the Map window.
column, and click OK.
Mentum Planet User Guide 39
Chapter 3
The Draw Angle dialog box opens.
4
In the Angle box, type the direction of the line in degrees with respect to true north.
5
In the Distance box, type the length of the line in kilometers.
6
Click in the Map window where you want the line to begin. The line is drawn in the Map window.
7
If you want to draw another line, modify the Angle and Distance values as needed, and click in the Map w indow at the start poin t of the line.
8
When you have finished drawing lines, close the Draw Angle dialog box.
40 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Sites And Sectors
Working with sector groups You can create groups and assign sites or individual sectors to one or more groups. You can then use these groups to make s elections when perf orming certain operations. For example, you could divide the sites in your p roject into four groups: North, South, East, and West. You could th en choose to generate predictions only for the sectors that are part of the North and E ast groups. Any sectors that are not part of these two groups will be ignored. Groups are organized in the Project Explorer according to whether or not they are used with Data Manager : n
n
Groups listed under the Shar ed node are s tored in Data Manager and will be available to other users. Groups listed under the Local node are not s tored in Data Manager. Even if the project is stored in D ata Manager, the groups under the Local node will not be available to other users.
When you add or remove a site or sector from a group, or delete an entire group, the sectors are not removed fr om the Sites list in the Project Explor er.
To create a sector group 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, right-click the Groups node and do one of the following: n
n
2
ChooseNe w Loc al to create a local group . The Add New Local Group dialog box opens. ChooseNe w Shared to create a shared gr oup. The Add New Shared Group dialog box opens.
Type a name for the new group and click OK. The group is added to either the Local or Shared node, under the Groups node in the Project Explorer .
3
Choose one or more sites or sectors from the Sites list or from another group and drag them to the group.
Mentum Planet User Guide 41
Chapter 3
TIP: You can also right-click either Local or Shar ed and choose New to create a new group under the chosen node.
TIP: You can also choose one or m ore sites or sectors in the Project Explo rer, rightclick and choose Copy, then right-click the grou p and choose Paste.
To display a group in a Map window n
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, right-click a group and choose View.
A new layer is c reated in the Map win dow that shows only the sites in the group. For information on working with map layers, see the appropriate User Guide for the technology you are using.
42 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Sites And Sectors
Editing sector groups You can rename or delete group s. You can also remove sites and sectors from groups. When you delete a grou p or remove sites or sectors from a gr oup, the sites or sectors are removed from the gr oup or the Groups node, but remain under the Sites node in the Project Explorer. You can also use the Tabular Editor to quickly edit sector group assignments. For more information, see the appropriate U ser Guide for the technology you are using.
To rename a group 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, right-click the group and choose Rename.
2
Type a new name for the group and press ENTER.
To remove a site or sector from a group 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites categor y, expand the group you want to edit.
2
In the group, right-click the site or sector you want to remove and choose Remove From Group .
To delete a group 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, expand Groups, right-click the group and choose Delete .
2
In the Mentum Planet dialog box, click Yes . The group is deleted from the Gr oups node in the Project Explorer, but the sites and sectors in the group are not deleted.
Mentum Planet User Guide 43
Chapter 3
To refresh the groups list n
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, right-click Groups and choose Refresh.
The groups list is ordered alphabetically.
To edit groups from the Site Pro perties dialog box You can assign sectors to groups or edit the groups to which a sector is assigned on the Sectors tab in the Site Properties dialog box.
1
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites categor y, expand the Groups or Sites node, right-click the site you want to edit and cho ose Edit.
2
In the Site Editor dialog box, in the tree view, choose the sector you want to edit.
3
Click the General tab.
4
In the Groups s ection, enable the check boxes next to those grou ps to which you want this sector to belong.
5
Click OK.
44 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Sites And Sectors
Working with flags Flags are properties that you can use to identify sectors as having certain characteristics (conditions). You can create multiple flags, and each flag can have multiple conditions, but you can assign only one condition per fl ag to a sector. The conditions of a flag should be a set of related but mutually exclusive values. Once you have assigned flag conditions to your sectors, you can enable specific flags using the check boxes under the Flags node in the Project Explorer. When you enable a flag cond ition in the Project Explorer, the flag icon changes from gray to color, indicating that the flag has active c onditions. When you right-click the Flags node in the Project Explorer and choose a command, only the sectors that have been ass igned conditions for the enabled flags will be used.
Example If you wanted to generate predictions for a new network based on sector status and location, you could create the flags and cond itions shown in Figure 3.3 .
Figure 3.3: Flags node in the Project Explorer. In this example, there are 3 sites (6 sectors) that satisfy the flag conditions. You would then assign one Status flag condition and one Location flag condition to each sector in your network. Figure 1.3 shows how you would assign a Status of Active and a Location of South to a sector.
Mentum Planet User Guide 45
Chapter 3
Figure 3.4: Assigning flag conditions to a sector You could then generate predictions based on both the status and location of a sector. For example, if you only wanted to generate predictions for active sectors located in the central or south, you would enable the Active condition for the Status flag and the Central and South conditions for the Location flag, as shown in Figure 1.2. In this example, the flag filter wo uld identify sites where the Location flag is Central OR South AND the Status flag is Active.
To create a flag 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, right-click Flags and choose New.
2
In the Add New Flag dialog box, type a name for the flag, and click OK. The name must contain only alphanumeric characters with no spaces. The new flag is added to the Project Explorer tree view in the Sites category. The new empty flag appears in the tree view under Flags.
To add a condition 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, right-click a flag and choose New Condition.
2
In the Add New Condition dialog box, type a name for the new condition, and click OK. The new condition is added to the Project Explorer tree view under the flag node.
46 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Sites And Sectors
To apply flag conditions to one or more sites 1
Do one of the following: n
n
In the Project Explorer , choose one or more sites, right-click and choose Tabular Edit. In the Map window, use the Marquee Select tool to choose one or mor e sites, and then choose Tabular Editor.
The Tabular Editor opens.
2
To modify flag data, in the Tabular Editor, click the Sectors tab, and do any of the following: n
Double-click in a table cell and type a new value.
n
Click the down arrow in a table cell and choose a new value.
n
Enable or clear the check box for the chosen setting.
n
Right-click in a table cell to copy and paste data.
n
Click the down arrow next to a table heading to di splay all the data or a particular subset. When a filter has been app lied, the down arrow changes to the filter icon.
3
To change the Tabular Editor display, do any of the follow ing: n
n
n
n
n
Click the Change Options button to specify which worksheets and columns to display in the Tabular Editor. Click the Sort Ascending button to reorder the rows based on the data in the selected column. Click the Sort Descending button to reorder the rows based on the data in the selected column. Place the pointer between colu mn headings to increase or decrease the size of the column. Enable the Freeze Panes check box to lock rows and columns in one area so that they remain visible when you scroll. This is usefu l, for example, if you want to freeze a
Mentum Planet User Guide 47
Chapter 3
particular column and then scroll through subsequent columns comparing the values.
4
To copy data to the clipboard, click the Copy To Clipboard button.
5
To paste from the clipboard, click the Paste From Clipboard button.
6
When you have finished modifying or examining the data, click Close .
NOTE: There are some columns that you cannot edit in the Tabu lar Editor. These columns are grayed out.
TIP: To quickly copy a value across all rows in a column in the Tabular Editor, type the new value in the fir st cell of the column, click the c olumn header to select the column, and press CTRL+D. Then, click outsid e the colum n to make the upda tes. Click Apply to save your changes.
TIP: To update displayed infor mation with current data, click the Refresh button. This update may be longer than when you click Apply because all data is recomputed.
To display sectors based on flag conditions You can quickly locate sectors identified with certain flags and conditions.
1
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites categor y, expand the Flags node, then expand the ind ividual flag nodes you want to view.
2
Enable the check boxes for the flag conditions you want to display.
3
Right-click the Flags node and choose View. A new layer is added to the Map wi ndow, showing the sites with the chosen flag conditions. For information on working with map layers, see the appropriate User Guide for the technology you are using.
48 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Sites And Sectors
Editing flags and conditions You can edit flags and conditi ons when you need to refine them. You can also use the Tabular Editor to quickly edit flags and conditions for a group of sectors. For information on working with map layers, see the appropriate Use r Guide for the technology you are using. You can use the Invert Conditions option to select all of the sites and sectors that have not been ass igned the enabled flag condi tions. When the Invert Conditions option is enabled , a check mark appears beside the menu command. The option remains enabled until you righ t-click the Flags node and choose Invert Conditions again.
To rename a flag 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites categor y, right-click a flag and choose Rename.
2
Type a new name for the flag and press ENTER.
To rename a condition 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, right-click the condition and choose Rename.
2
Type a new name for the condition and press ENTER.
To delete a flag or condition 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites categor y, right-click a flag or condition and choose Delete .
2
In the confirmation dialog box, click Ye s.
To invert flag conditions 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, right-click the Flags node and choose Invert Conditions .
Mentum Planet User Guide 49
Chapter 3
The Invert Conditions option is enabl ed, and all of the sites and sectors that have not been assigned the enabled flag conditions will be selected.
2
To turn off the Invert Conditions option, right-click the Flags node and choose Invert Conditions again.
50 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Sites And Sectors
Modifying sector symbols for individual sites Sites and sectors are displayed using the sector display scheme you associate with the sector. To modify sec tor symbols for multiple sites, you can define a s ector display scheme and use the Tabula r Editor to associate it to multiple sec tors. For more see the appropriate User Guide for the technology you are using.
To modify color and symbol settings for individual sites 1
In the Site Editor , in the tree view, choose the sector you wan t to modify in the tree view.
2
Click the General tab.
3
From the Sector Display Schemes list, choose the scheme you want to associate with the sector. Only those sector display schemes that appear beneath the Sector Display Schemes node in the Project Explorer are available.
4 5
In the Site Editor , click Apply. Click Close .
NOTE: The rotation angle of se ctor symbols is defined by the azimuth of the sector.
Mentum Planet User Guide 51
Chapter 3
Customizing sector symbols for multiple sites You can customize sector symbols by creating and applying sector display schemes based on sector properties such as: n
the antenna height
n
the antenna beamwidth
n
n
the PA power Uplink loading
You can also use sector display schemes to show the relationship between sectors and repeaters or between sectors and non co-located sectors. Sector display schemes are saved as .xm l files. shows a sector displ ay scheme.
Figure 3.5: Sector display scheme showing various symbol types and sizes. The lines from site11 illustrates how a sector/repeater r elationship can be shown on the map. Within one sector display scheme you can define settings for various technologies. Sector display schemes are saved in the Sector Display Scheme folder within your project. You can apply sector display schemes to sector group s, to sectors ass igned specific flags, or to all sectors. Sector display schemes are no t dynamic. If you apply a sector
52 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Sites And Sectors
display scheme but then change the value of the sector property upon which the scheme is based, the sector symbo l is not auto matically up dated. You must reapply the sector display scheme in order to see your changes reflected in the Map window. You can also define an active sector display scheme that will be used when you place new sites.
NOTE: In order to view sec tor relationships in the Map window, you must first add the SiteFile_ Relation layer to the Map window. To do s o, in the W indows category of the Project Explor er, expand the Map Windows node, right-click the SiteFile group node, and choose Add Layer. In the Add Layer dialog box, choose the SiteFile_Relation layer and click OK.
To create a sector display scheme 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Project Data category, rightclick the Sector Display Schemes node and choose New.
2
Type a name for the new sector display scheme and click OK. The Sector Display Scheme dialog box opens.
3
From the Technology list, choose the technology of the sectors for which you are creating the sector display scheme. You can define sector display scheme settings for different technologies within the same one sector display scheme.
4
In the Display Options section, enable the check boxes for th e settings you want to specify for the sector display scheme. If you clear a check box, settings for that display option are not used.
5
If you enabled the Symbol check box, click the Symbol tab.
6
From the Omni-directional Antenna list, choose the symbol you want to use to represent omni-directional antennas (i.e., antennas that have a 360 degree horizontal beamwidth).
Mentum Planet User Guide 53
Chapter 3
7
From the Sectorized Antenna list, choose the symbol you want to use to represent antennas that have a horizontal beamwidth less than 360 degrees. The Arrow symbol displays sectors based on the direction of the antenna without any reference to the beamwidth. All other symbols display both the direction of the antenna and the beamwidth. The width of the symbol represents the horizontal beamwidth. The accuracy of the s ymbols is within 10 degrees.
8
9
In the Background section, choose one of the follow ing options: n
None—no background is displayed.
n
Halo—the symbol is outlined with a white border.
n
Border—the symbol is outlined with a black border.
In the Effects section, enable any of the following check boxes: n
n
Drop Shadow—a drop shadow is displayed beneath the symbol. Bold—the symbol is displayed in bold.
you button are creating a detailed sector display scheme statistical click the 10 If Data to view statistics and, for once you havedata, finished viewing the dat a, click Close .
11 If you enabled the Color check box, click the Color tab. 12 Do one of the following: n
n
To base colo r on a property, choose the Based On Property option, and then choose the sec tor property for which you wan t to specify a color. To base color on an identifier, choose the Based On Identifier option, and then choose the s etting for which you want to s pecify a color.
Default v alues are displayed for some properties and identifier s.
13
Do any of the following:
54 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Sites And Sectors
n
n
n
n
To change the color associ ated with a value, click the color i n the Color column, choose a new color , and click OK. To add a valu e, click Ad d, choose a value fr om the list of available values or type a value in the box, and click OK. To add multiple identifiers (e.g., based on propagation models, antenna files, or technol ogy), click the Lookup & Add All button. To delete a value, choose a row in the tab le and cli ck Delete . If the value you are deleting is a flag condition, all conditions in the table are deleted.
14 Repeat Step 13 to add, delete, or change a value. 15 If you enabled the Size check box, click the Size tab. 16 From the Property To Use list, choose the property you want to use to determine the size of the sector symbol. For more information on the proper ties av ailable, press the F1 key.
17 In the Property Value section, specify the rang e of the property value in the From and To boxes.
18 In the Point Size section, specify the range of the symbol point size in the From and To boxes. The symbol size will be determined by the values you specified in Step 17. Values that fall outside the specified range will be increased up to the minimum value or reduced to the maximum level. For example, if you chose Height as the property value and defined the “From” value as 20 meters and the “To” value as 100 meter s, then all sectors that have a height of 20 or less will use the point size you defined in the From box and all sectors that have a height of 100 or more will use the point size you defined in the To box. The symbol size of sectors with a height that falls between the From and To values will be interpolated linearly using the From and To values defined in the Point Size section.
19 If you enabled the Relationship check box, click the Relationship tab. Ensure you have added the SiteFile_ Relation layer to the Map window.
Mentum Planet User Guide 55
Chapter 3
20 If you want to define a display scheme to represent the relation ship between a site and a repeater, do the following in the Repeaters section: n
Choose a line style from the Styles list.
n
Click the color squ are and choose a line color.
n
Choose the line wid th from the Width list.
21 If you want to define a display scheme to represent the relation ship between a site and a non co-located sec tor, do the following in the Non Co-located Sectors section: n
Choose a line style from the Styles list.
n
Click the color squ are and choose a line color.
n
Choose the line wid th from the Width list.
22 Repeat Step 3 to Step 21 to define sector display scheme settings for additional technologies.
23 Click OK to save sector display scheme settings. The sector display scheme is added under the Sector Display Schemes node in the Project Explor er. Sector display schemes are s aved as .xml files.
To define an active sector display scheme The active sector display scheme is used when you place a new site. If there is no active sector displ ay scheme, the defa ult symb ol, size, and color ar e used.
1
In the Project Data categor y, expand the Sector Display Schemes node.
2
Right-click a sector display scheme and choose Active . The icons associated with sector display schemes indicate which sector display scheme is currently active, as shown in Figure 3.5.
56 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Sites And Sectors
Figure 3.6: Sector Display Schemes node in the Project Explor er
To add a sector display scheme 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Project Data category, rightclick Sector Display Schemes and choose Add.
2
In the dialog box that opens, navigate to where the sector display scheme file (.xml) is stored and click Open.
To apply a sector display scheme You can remove sector display schemes that are visible in the Map window.
1
Do the following to apply the default sector symbol, size and color in the Map window: n
n
2
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, right-click the Sites node and choose Secto r Display Scheme Apply . Project Data categor y, expand the Sector Display Schemes node.
Right-click the display scheme you want to apply and choose Apply.
Mentum Planet User Guide 57
Chapter 3
3
In the Select Sectors dialog box, specify the sectors to which you want to apply a sector display scheme by choosing one of the following options in the Sector Selectio n section: n
n
n
4
All Sectors to apply the scheme to all sectors in the project. Current Selection if you have selected specific sectors in the Map window. Flag Filtering if you have defined and assigned flags to sectors. Enable the Invert Conditions check box to select those sectors for which the applied conditions do not apply.
n
Group Selection if you have defined and created groups.
n
Query Selection if you have defined and created sector queries.
In the Band Filtering section, enable the bands you want to include in your sector selection. The sectors to which the sector display scheme will be applied are displayed in the Selected Sectors list.
5
Click OK. Sectors that meet the criteria defined in the sector display scheme are modified accordingly.
NOTE: You can also apply a sector display scheme from th e Sites cate gory of the Project Explorer. Right-click the Flags nod e, a group within the Groups node, or the Sites node, and choose Sector Display Scheme. In the Select Scheme di alog box, choose the sec tor display scheme you want to apply or choose Defaul t Symbol, and click Apply.
NOTE: When you get a project from Data Manager, the default sector symbol is used. You must reapply the sector displ ay scheme to see changes. Similarly, if you make any changes to sector properties after you have applied a sector display scheme, you will need to reapply the sector display scheme to see changes.
58 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Sites And Sectors
To apply the default sector symbol You can apply the default sector symbol, size, and color to rem ove se ctor display schemes that are visible in the Map window.
1
Do the following to apply the default sector symbol, size and color in the Map window: n
n
2
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, right-click the Sites node and choose Secto r Display Scheme Apply . In the Select Scheme dialog box, choose None, and click Apply.
To remove relationship lines from the sector display scheme that are still visible in the Map windo w, do the following: n
n
In the Project Explorer , in the Windows categor y, expand the Map Windows node. Right-click the SiteFile_Relation node and choose Remove .
Mentum Planet User Guide 59
Chapter 3
Adding custom data You can add value to a Mentum Planet project by including custom attributes that more fully describe base stations, sites, sectors, repeaters, antennas, and transceivers. You can add custom data: n
n
at the project level ( in which case the data is saved locally and is not shared) at the Data Manager level (in which case the data is saved in the Data Manager and can be shared with other users)
Local custom data To add local custom data, you must first defi ne the custom data definition in the project settin gs. You can ad d local custo m data to base statio ns, sites, sectors, carriers, and antennas. This data is not saved in Dat a Manager. Once the new custom attributes are defined, you can add inform ation to them using: n
the Site Editor
n
n
the Tabular Editor the Import/Export Wizard
Shared custom data To add shared custom data, the Data Manager Ad ministrator must define custom data columns in the Data Manager Server Console. You can only add shared custom data for sites, sectors, and repeaters. When you conn ect to the Data M anager and update your local project, you will see new custom data attribu tes in the Site Editor . Once the new custom attribu tes are added, you can add information to them using : n
the Site Editor
n
the Tabular Editor
n
the Import/Export Wizard
60 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Sites And Sectors
To add local custom data 1
In Mentum Planet, from the Edit menu, choose Project Settings.
2
In the Project Settings dialog box, if you are adding a list of predefined values, click the Custom List tab to define list
3
Click the Custom Data tab and, for each item in the tree view, define the custom attributes you want available in the project.
values.
To add shared custom data 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, right-click a site and choose Edit. The Site Editor opens.
2
Do one of the following; n
To add site user data, click Site User Data and, in the Site User Data dialog box, specify values for the available parameters, and click OK.
n
n
n
n
To add base stat ion user data, in the tree view , choose th e base station for whi ch you want to specify user data, and click the User Data tab, and specify values for the available parameters. To add sector u ser data, in the tree view , choose the sector for which you want to specify user data, click the User Data tab, and specify values for the available parameters. To add repeater user data, in the tree view, choose the repeater for which you want to specify user data, click the User Data tab, and specify values for the available parameters . To add antenna user data, in the tree view, expand the Antennas node, choose the antenna f or which you want to specify user data , click the User Data tab, and specify values for the available parameters.
Mentum Planet User Guide 61
Chapter 3
Optimizing a single site In order to quickly ascertain the imp act of changes you make to se ctor settings, you can optimize a single site and view the impact on coverage and interference layers (i.e., the best server signal strength layer and the C/(N+I) layer). The process of optimizing a single site involves generating predictions along radials that span 170 degrees (ignoring the antenna backlobe). Points spread along the radials are then optimized using the defined c riteria and layers are generated. If the proposed changes to sector and antenn a parameters are acceptable, you can apply those changes to the site. NOTE: Before optimizing a site, define optimi zation constraints for the antenna pattern in the Site Editor.
To optimize a single site 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites categor y, expand a s ite node, right-click a base station and choose Optimize.
2
In the Sector Selectio n dialog box, from the Band list, choose the band you want to optimize.
3
In the Sectors Or Repeaters To Consider section, choose one of the following: n
n
n
4
All if you want to include all sectors. Current Selection if you have selected specific sectors in the Map window. Flag Filtering if you have defined and assigned flags to sectors. Enable the Invert Conditions check box to select those sectors for which the applied conditions do not apply.
n
Group Selection if you have defined and created groups.
n
Query Selection if you have defined and created sector queries.
Click Select.
62 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Sites And Sectors
5
In the Site Optimization Tool dialog box, click the General tab and specify general optimization parameter s.
6
Click the Optimization tab and define optimizati on goals.
Mentum Planet User Guide 63
Chapter 3
Site Optimization Tool Use the Site Optimization Tool to quickly evaluate the impact of changes you make to site and antenna parameters.
General Use A Traffic Map —choose from this list the traffic map you want to use when generating layers.
Receiver Noise Figure—type in this box the noise figure you want to assume at the receiver. Maximum Transmit Power —type in this box the maximum transmit power. Antenna Gain—type in this box the antenna gain at the receiver. Environment—choose from this list the environment for which the site is to be optimized.
Antennas Initial values are initially retrieved from the settings in the network but may change when you optimize the site. You can also define values that you can apply to the network.
NOTE: If you decide to define antenna values but do not click App ly, the current network values are used when optimizing a site. Sector Name —displays the name of the sector. Antenna ID—displays the antenna identification. Azimuth—displays the azimuth f or the associated antenna. You can edit this value as required. Tilt—displays the tilt for the associated antenna. You can edit this value as requir ed. Antenna Model—displays the antenna m odel. You can change the model you want to assign to the sector for the site optimization analysis by choosing a model from the list.
65 Mentum Planet User Guide
Site Optimization Tool - General
Electrical Tilt —displays the electrical tilt of the antenna. This parameter is only available when electrical par ameters are enabled for th e antenna. You can edit this value as required. Electrical Azimuth —displays the electrical azimuth of th e antenna. This parameter is only available when electrical parameters are enabled for the antenna. You can edit this value as requir ed. Electrical Beamwidth—displays the electrical beamwidth of the antenna. This parameter is only available when electrical parameters are enabled for the antenna. You can edit this value as requir ed. Area—displays the area covered. Traffic—displays the traffi c s upported. This column is available only when using a traffic map.
Layers Update —enable this check box update layers based on your changes. Close On Exit —enable this check box to close the layer displayed when you close the Site Optimization Tool. View Coverage Layer —enable thisSSOT_SignalStrength check box to display the best This server signal strength coverage layer (i.e., layer). layer displays the best received signal strength from all sectors. View C/(N+I) Layer—enable this check box to display the interference layer (i.e., SSOT_CNIR layer). This layer displays the ratio between the best received signal strength and the sum of all other received signal strengths. Extent Size —type in this box the extents of the displayed layer. Resolution—type in this box the resolution of the displayed layer. Carrier Standard—choose from this list the carrier standard to use when optimizing a cdma2000 site.
Mentum Planet User Guide 66
Chapter 3
Site Optimization Tool Use the Site Optimization Tool to quickly evaluate the impact of changes you make to site and antenna parameters.
Optimization Use the Optimization tab to specify the optimization criteria you want to use in single site optimization.
Optimization Goals Use Optimization Profile —choose from this list the optimization profile that contains the optimization goals you want to use for single site optimization. Use Generic Goals —choose this optio n to define coverage, interference, and area parameters for single s ite optimization. WCDMA Optimize CPICH Ec Coverage —enable this check box to define the CPICH Ec coverage threshold. Optimize Interference—enable this check box to choose whether to optimize interference using a capacity or CPICH threshol d. Optimize Capacity —choose this option to define a capacity threshold. Optimize CPICH Ec/Io —choose this option to define a CPICH Ec/Io threshold. Maintain CPICH Ec Coverage —enable this check box to maintain CPICH Ec coverage. cdma2000 Optimize Pilot Ec Coverage —enable this check box to define the Pilot Ec coverage threshold. Optimize Interference—enable this check box to choose whether to optimize interference using a capacity or Pilot threshold. Optimize Capacity —choose this option to define a capacity threshold. Optimize Pilot Ec/Io —choose this option to define a Pilot Ec/Io threshold.
67 Mentum Planet User Guide
Site Optimization Tool - General
Maintain Pilot Ec Coverage —enable this check box to maintain Pilot Ec coverage. GSM Optimize Ec Coverage —enable this check box to define the Ec coverage threshold. Optimize Interference—enable this check box to choose whether to optimize interference using a capacity or Ec threshold. Optimize Capacity —choose this option to define a capacity threshold. Optimize Ec/Io —choose this option to define a Ec/Io threshold. Maintain Ec Coverage —enable this check box to maintain Ec coverage. LTE FDD Optimize RSRP Coverage —enable this check box to define the RSRP coverage threshold. Optimize Interference—enable this check box to choose whether to optimize interference using a capacity or RSRQ\RSRP threshold. Optimize Capacity —choose this option to define a capacity threshold. Optimize RSRQ—choose this option to define a RSRQ threshold. Maintain RSRP Coverage—enable this check box to maintain RSRP coverage. LTE TDD Optimize RSRP Coverage —enable this check box to define RSRP coverage threshold. Optimize Interference—enable this check box to choose whether to optimize interference using a capacity or RSRQ\RSRP threshold. Optimize Capacity —choose this option to define a capacity threshold. Optimize RSRQ—choose this option to define a RSRQ threshold. Maintain RSRP Coverage—enable this check box to maintain RSRP coverage. TDMA-FDMA
Mentum Planet User Guide 68
Chapter 3
Optimize Ec Coverage —enable this check box to define the Ec coverage threshold. Optimize Interference—enable this check box to choose whether to optimize interference using a capacity or Ec threshold. Optimize Capacity —choose this option to define a capacity threshold. Optimize Ec/Io —choose this option to define a Ec/Io threshold. Maintain Ec Coverage —enable this check box to maintain Ec coverage. WiMAX TDD Optimize Ec Coverage —enable this check box to define the Ec coverage threshold. Optimize Ec —enable this check box to choose whether to optimize interference using a capacity or Ec threshold. Optimize Capacity —choose this option to define a capacity threshold. Optimize Ec/Io —choose this option to define a Ec/Io threshold. Maintain Ec Coverage —enable this check box to maintain Ec coverage.
Traffic/Area Coverage Limit Sector Relative Coverage Variation —choose this option to define the maximum relative traffic variation as a percentage. Limit Sector Absolute Coverage —choose this option define the minimum and maximum traffic values to use when limiting coverage.
69 Mentum Planet User Guide
Chapter 4 Managing Antenna Systems In Mentum Planet, you can model a wireless communication n etwork that takes advantage of the performance gains achieved using adaptive antenna systems (AAS) and Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) antenna sy stems. If they are available, you can also assign three-dimensional antennas wher e several horizontal and vertical patterns are used. Using the availa ble Editors, you can organize, view, and manage all element s of the antenna system. This chapter covers the following topics:
Unde rstanding ante nna systems
71
Workf low fo r adding antenna patterns to a project
76
Workflow for mode ling ante nna patterns
77
Importing antenna patterns in the NSMA or Planet format Importing Multiple Ante nna Files
78 79
Downloading antenna patterns from the Antenna Server Opening and viewing ante nnapatterns
80 82
Editing antenna algorithm parameters Editingante nnapatte rns
83 85
Printing an tenna patterns Adding antenna patterns toaproje ct Groupingantennapatte rns Using antenna queries
89 90 92 94
Mentum Planet User Guide 70
Chapter 4
Understanding antenna systems Using Mentum Planet, you can model advan ced antenna systems such as adaptive antenna syste ms and MIMO systems. To do so, you must fir st create the antenna system by specifying: n
n
n
n
n
general antenna information the master antenna, which defines the vertical an d horizontal antenna patterns. In the case of smart antennas, the master antenna corresponds to the antenna used for the preamble signal, and potentially for other pilot or control channels. the physical antennas th at make up the pattern. Each physical antenna has its own configuration (i.e., tilt, azimu th, twist, location), frequency range, and electrical tilt if you are using smart antennas, the antenna array, which is a collection of antenna elements if you are using smart antennas, antenna elements, which define the vertical and horizontal antenna patterns
You manage antenna systems using the following Ed itors: n
n
n
the Antenna Editor, where you define the variou s parts of the antenna system as listed above. the Antenna Algorithm Editor, where y ou define required parameters to model smart antennas and multiple antenna systems the Site Editor, where you define the general characteristics of the antenna system assigned to the sector as well as the antenna tuning parameters that will be used in prediction gener ation. You must also specify the antenna optimization constraints you want to use in antenna optimization.
How antenna systems are used in network planning Antenna manufacturers generally provide antenna patterns for both the horizontal and vertical planes as ASCII or binary files. Many manufactu rers also provide additional patterns with s pecific electrical tilt values. Although antenna patterns represent an approximation of reality und er ideal conditions, they are c onsidered sufficient for planning purposes.
71 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Antenna Systems
Figure 4.1: Horizontal plane of an antenna pattern Figure 4.1 illustrates how an antenna distributes its energy over the horizontal plane. Figure 4.2 illustrates how an antenna distributes energy over the vertical plane. In both examples, the boresight is at zero degr ees. The horizontal pattern is specified in terms of a clockwise angle, while the vertical pattern is displayed in terms of an angle measured down ward from the horizontal.
Mentum Planet User Guide 72
Chapter 4
Figure 4.2: Vertical plane of an antenna pattern . Antenna patterns are used when generatin g signal strength pred ictions. The orientation between any ground point and the sector location is determined and the antenna gain is calculated based on this orien tation. In most cases s ome interpolation is requir ed, because antenna pattern s do not provide a pattern gain in every possible orientation. The orientation b etween the tower and the grou nd point is resolved into an azimuth and inclination relative to the direction in which the antenna is pointing. The actual antenna gain for the particu lar orientation is t he sum of the horizontal gain (based on the azimuth), the vertical gain (based on the inclination), and the boresight gain. Figure 4.3 shows how small variations in the vertical pattern can have a major effect on the horizontal distance covered.
Figure 4.3: Antenna height versus coverage distance Depending on the resolution of the signal strength grid file (which will be the same as that of the elevation grid file), it may not be possible to observe the influence of the antenna vertical gain distribution at larger angles, beyond the bin in which the antenna is located. For example, if the gri d size is 50 meter s, and the antenna height is 30 meters, the inclination an gle to the center of the next grid will be about -31 degrees. Therefore, the influence of all vertical gains between -3 1 degrees and -90 degrees is contained in the single bin where the sector is located.
Optimization of antenna patterns In order to better model the backlobe of the antenna in generated pr edictions, you can define correction factors that will be applied during antenna masking on a persector basi s. This is useful, for example, when the anten na system is moun ted on a wall, affects its radiating pattern. Using the correction f actors, you can better adaptwhich the antenna behavior to the environment.
73 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Antenna Systems
These correction factors, however, are not taken into account when model tuning. As a result, there could be slight discrepan cies between model turn ing results and the comparison of predictions and measurements that are based on sector antennas.
Required accuracy for antenna patterns Antenna patterns an approximation of reality under ideal conditions. When field or laborrepresent atory measurements are taken, the transmission path is cleared of reflections so that what is measured is the energy distribution in space and not the transmission chann el. Also, antennas are generally installed so that no near field effect occurs, potentially causing a significan t change to the radiation pattern. In order to model real-wor ld networks, you must account for sub-optimal transmission tower installations, and reflections from the ground and surrounding structures. This is why it is important to remove very deep nulls (a null is defined as a direction where very little energy is dispersed). In Figure 4.3, there is a null at +/-15 degrees in the vertical gain of the antenna. Also, side-lobes ( transmission lobes other than the main lobe) are often disturbed by elements located in the near field when the installation is not properly done or where constraints make it impossible to perform an optimal installation. In order to alleviate this pr oblem, side-lobes may be averaged. It is also important to use high-resolution antenn a patterns to provide highresolution signal strength predictions. In practice though, using a resolution of more than one degree is unnecessary due to imprecise installations. Vertical antenna patterns are generally more sensitive as they tend to be narrower than horizontal patterns. For this reason, the typical resolution f or antenna patterns ranges from 10 degrees to 1 degree for the horizontal and from 5 to 0.5 for the vertical pattern. Vertical pattern s are needed only for a few tens of degrees (e.g., -30 to 30) around the horizon poin t (defined as 0 degrees). This is a simple geometric consideration, since for a 100 meter high transmit site, 30 degrees of elevation angle is reached after only 17 2 meters. At such a s hort distance from the transmit site, the amount of received energy is often due more to reflections than to the main path. Mentum Planet propagation models use the full horizontal pattern but a vertical pattern with values between + 52° and -73° (if available).
Mentum Planet User Guide 74
Chapter 4
Antenna pattern formats Mentum Planet stores antenna patterns in .paf (Planet Antenna Form at) files. Since manufacturers typically supply antenna patterns in a limited number of standard formats, you may have to convert anten na patterns into the .paf format. You can convert the srcinal Planet antenna format (.dpa) as well as .nsm formats to the new .paf format. For more information on convertin g antenna pattern s, see "Importing antenna patterns in the NSMA or Planet format" on page 78 . Antenna pattern sets that are a .dpa format and which include electrical tilt patterns must also be converted to ensure they display hierarchically in the Project Explorer and work with thir d-party tools. To combine antenn a patterns into one .paf file, see "Importing Multiple Antenna Files" on page 79
75 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Antenna Systems
Workflow for adding antenna patterns to a project Antenna files saved in the \global\Antennas folder are available for any new project you create. Antenna files save d in the Antennas folder within an individu al project are project-specific. Step 1
If required, convert antenna files to Planet Anten na Format (.paf) files. See “Importing antenna patterns in the NSMA or Planet format”.
Step 2
If required, connect to the Antenna Server and download the required antenna pattern in .paf format.
Step 3
If you are using multiple antennas, configure and assign the antenna algorithms associated with the antenna pattern. See “Editing antenna algorithm parameters” .
Step 4
If required, edit antenna patterns. See “Editing antenna patterns” .
Step 5
Add antenna patterns to your project. See “Adding antenna patterns to a project” .
Mentum Planet User Guide 76
Chapter 4
Workflow for modeling antenna patterns Step 1
In the Project Data category of the Project Explorer, create and tune the propagation models you are using.
Step 2
In the Antenna Editor, create an antenna system.
Step 3
In the Site Editor, for each sector , assign an antenna, define general antenna parameters, antenna correction factors, and antenna optimization constraints.
Step 4
Generate predictions.
77 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Antenna Systems
Importing antenna patterns in the NSMA or Planet format You can import antenna patterns in the NSMA (.nsm or .adf) antenna format or Planet (.pln) format and convert them to the Mentum Planet (.paf) antenna pattern format. If an antenna file contains more than one pattern , the patterns are saved in one .paf file. Converted antenna patterns are saved in the source folder with a .paf file extension using the same name as the source file. There is no need to save the converted patterns. When you convert full antenn a patterns, the full pattern w ill display in the Antenna Editor. In Mentum Planet, however, propagation models use the full horizontal pattern while using a vertical pattern with values between + 52° and -73° (if available). Some third-party tools, for example propagation models, use the full vertical pattern.
To import an antenna pattern in .dpa f ormat 1
ChooseEdit
Antennas .
The Antenna Editor opens.
2 3
4
ChooseFi le
Import Fi le .
In the Import dialog box, navigate to the folder containing the antenna patterns, choose the files that you wan t to convert and click Open. In the confirmation dialog box, click OK. The antenna pattern opens in the Antenna Editor where you can view and modify antenna c haracteristics.
5
Click one of the following buttons: n
Save—saves the antenna pattern without closing the Antenna Editor.
n
Close Editor.—saves the antenna pattern and closes the Antenna
Mentum Planet User Guide 78
Chapter 4
Importing Multiple Antenna Files You can import multiple antenna patterns and save them as a single .paf file. In order to do so, you must first create an antenna definition file in a .txt or .csv format using a tab or a semi-colon as the s eparator. The antenna definition file must contain the following information: Parent Antenna
Antenna file with .paf extension
Child Antenna
Antenna file with .dpa, .pln, .nsm, .adf extension Frequency band with a minus as separator between the minimum and the maximum frequency (e .g., 1850-1990). This is an optional parameter and may be left blank.
Frequency E-Tilt
Optional.
E-Azimuth
Optional
The first field of the first line of the antenna definition file must contain "Antenna Definition File". All child antennas associated with a parent are saved in one .paf file.
CAUTION: The antenna definition file must be saved in the same folder as the antenna files you want to import.
To import multiple antenna files 1
ChooseEdit
Ante nnas .
The Antenna Editor opens.
2 3
Choose Fil e
Import From Definition File .
In the Import Antennas From A Definition File dialog box, navigate to where the .txt or .csv file is saved and click Open.
79 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Antenna Systems
Downloading antenna patterns from the Antenna Server You can download antenna patterns in the Planet Antenna File (.paf) format from the Antenna Server , where vendors have posted the latest antenna files. You cannot access the Antenna Server if you are using the standalone version of the Antenna Editor or if you are using Windows 2000. In order to use the Antenna Server, you must have the .NET Framework, version 3.5 with Service Pack 1 installed.
To download antenna patterns 1
ChooseEdit
Antennas .
The Antenna Editor opens.
2
ChooseFi le
Download Fi les .
The Download dialog box opens.
3
On the Search tab, define the search criteria.
Mentum Planet User Guide 80
Chapter 4
For detailed information on the settings available on this tab, press the F1 key for online Help.
4
Click the Antenna List tab to view the search results.
5
Do one of the following: n
n
6
CTRL+Click to s elect the antennas you want to downlo ad. Click Select All to select all antennas.
Click Download.
7
In the Browse For Folder dialog box, navigate to the folder where you want to save the antenna file and click OK.
8
In the Download Progress dialog box, click one of the following buttons: n
Open File —opens the .paf file in the Antenna Editor
n
Open Folder—opens the folder where you have saved the .paf file.
n
Close —closes the dialog box.
81 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Antenna Systems
Opening and viewing antenna patterns The file format of antenna patterns varies depending upon the manufacturer. Mentum Planet can directly open antenna patterns in several formats; however, you should verify that the data you want to open is valid and correctly formatted. For some antenna patter ns, you will need to confi rm whether the positive values contained in the antenna pattern file are gain values or not. You can view high quality plots of both the horizontal and vertical antenna patterns in the Antenna Editor. You can customize the antenna pattern display by changing the colors used or by modifying the s cale. You can also print antenna information and pattern s.
To open an antenna pattern 1
ChooseEdit
Ante nnas .
2
In the Antenna Editor dialog box, choose Fi le
3
Choose the antenna pattern (.paf) file that you want to open and click Open.
Open Fi le .
The antenna pattern is displayed in the Antenna Editor.
To open an antenna pattern f rom the Project Explorer n
In the Project Explorer , in the Project Data category, expand the Antenna Files node, right-click an antenna pattern and choose Edit.
Antenna patterns are listed in the Project Data category of the Project Explorer. The icons of antenn a patterns that have been assigned to a sector are displayed in color . The icons of antenn a patterns that have not been assigned to sectors, but are located in the An tennas folder of the project, appear dimmed. TIP: You can also open an antenna pattern by dou ble-clicking it in the Project Explorer.
Mentum Planet User Guide 82
Chapter 4
Editing antenna algorithm parameters You can configure the algorithms used with MIMO and smart antennas in order to meet the requirements of the technology you are using. The tabs displayed in the Antenna Algorithm Editor depend on the technology and the antenna algorithm you choose. This procedure provides an overview of the workflow. You can find detailed param eter descriptions in the online Help. Antenna algorithms are saved as algorithm (.algr) files and are stored in the Antenna Algorithms folder within an individual project.
To edit algorithm parameters 1
ChooseEdit
Antenna Algorithms.
The Antenna Algorithm Editor opens.
2
In the tree view, expand the node for the network technology you are using ((i.e., WiMAX, LTE, HSPA).
3
If you chose WiMAX in step 2, choose one of the following antenna algorithms: n
n
n
Smart Antenna WiMAX MIMO A WiMAX MIMO B
83 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Antenna Systems
4
n
WiMAX Automatic MIMO Switching
n
Smart Antenna + WiMAX MIMO A
n
Smart Antenna + WiMAX MIMO B
n
Smart Antenna + AMS
If you chose LTE in step 2, choose one of the following antenna algorithms:
5
n
Smart Antenna
n
Diversity
n
MIMO
n
Automatic MIMO Switching
n
Smart Antenna + Diversity
n
Smart Antenna + MIMO
n
Smart Antenna + AMS
If you chose HSPA in step 2, choose the following antenna algorithm: n
6
MIMO
Click the tabs associated w ith the antenna and define the required parameters. For detailed information on the settings available on these tabs, press F1 for online Help.
Mentum Planet User Guide 84
Chapter 4
Editing antenna patterns You may need to edit antenna patterns so that they conform to Mentum Planet guidelines and accuracy principles or to correct the way the antenna patterns account for antenna gain. An antenna pattern must follow these basic guidelines to be usable with Mentum Planet: n
n
n
n
The directivity of the antenna patter n must be the amount of gain in any given direction c ompared with the maximum gain of the antenna. The directivit y, therefore, can only be equal to or less than zero decibels. In most cases , the horizontal plane must be aligned so that the boresight angle is at zero degrees. Exceptions to th is rule occur, for example, when the antenna has multiple main lob es or e lectrical tilts. In these cas es, the boresight angle can be at an azimuth different than zero degrees. The vertical plan e must be aligned so that zero degr ees is horizontal. The horizontal pattern must always be provid ed. The vertical pattern is option al, and the vertical pattern gai n will be assumed to be zero decibels at all inclinations when the vertical pattern is not provided. Nonetheless, it is not a sound engineering practice to use a horizontal-only pattern fo r signal strength predictions, as it can create significant prediction error s near the sector.
In Mentum Planet, the antenna pattern m ust be described as the amount of gain in any given direction compared with the boresigh t gain of the antenna. Information about antenna patterns is displayed in the lower left corner of the dialog box. The horizontal and ve rtical boresight angles and beamwidth angles are displayed in the Information section. shows the beamwidth and the boresig ht angle.
85 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Antenna Systems
Figure 4.4: Illustration of the beamwidth and the boresight angle.
To edit antenna patterns 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Project Data category, expand the Antenna Files node, right-click an antenna pattern and choose Edit. The Antenna Editor opens.
Mentum Planet User Guide 86
Chapter 4
2
Modify the settings on any of the following tabs: n
n
n
n
General—allows you to define and view information about the antenna such as the name, manufacturer, polarization, cost, length, width, etc. You can also specify param eters related to the antenna band and physica l antenna. When you defi ne electrica l tilt values, an eTilt node is added beneath the antenna for each degree of tilt. Master Antenna —allows you to view details of the master antenna, which consists of the hori zontal and vertical planes of a physical antenna . You can define display pref erences and update antenna information. The Master Antenn a contains all the information that defines the main antenna and is typically used for transmission and reception of signals that are common to all subscribers ( e.g., common channels and synchronization signals). Multiple Antenna—allows you to specify details about smart antenna or MIMO system capabilities. Antenna Element—allows you to view antenna elements that form an antenna array, which is the association of several antenna elements. You can define the inclination and or ientation of the antenna pattern, specify display pr eferences as well as e xamine the antenna information. This tab is only visible when the antenna is a smart antenna.
87 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Antenna Systems
For detailed information on the settings available on these tabs, press F1 for online Help.
Mentum Planet User Guide 88
Chapter 4
Printing antenna patterns You can print antenna patterns from the Antenn a Editor for your referen ce. Before you print, you can preview the antenn a pattern to ensur e that it displays as y ou expect.
To preview an antenna pattern 1
In the Antenna Editor, chooseFi le
2
In the Print Preview dialog box, do any of the following: n
n
3
Print Prev iew .
Click the Zoom button or choose a pre-defined zoom level to change how the preview is displayed. Click the Print button if you are ready to print.
Click Close .
To print an antenna pattern 1
In the Antenna Editor, chooseF ile
2
In the Print dialog box, specify the printer, page size, source, and orientation, and click Print.
89 Mentum Planet User Guide
Print .
Managing Antenna Systems
Adding antenna patterns to a project Mentum Planet includes a small set of default antenna fi les; however, you can add additional antenna pattern files as required. Antenna files must be in the Mentum Planet antenna (.paf) file format. For information on importin g antenna patter ns, see “Importing antenna patterns in the NSMA or Planet format”. Antenna patterns are added to the Project Data category of the Project Explorer. By default, only assigned an tennas are displayed beneath the Antennas node when you open a project.
To add antenna pattern files to a project Antenna files must be saved in the Antennas folder either within a specific project or in the \global\Antennas folder. Antenna pattern files saved in the global\Antennas folder are available for all new projects you create.
1
In the Project Explorer , in the Project Data category, rightclick the Antenna Files node and choose Add.
2
In the Open dialog box, choose the Mentum Planet antenna (.paf) files that you want to add to your project and click Open.
To view or hide unassigned antenna patterns 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Project Data category, rightclick Antenna Files and choose one of the following commands: n
Show Unassigned Antennas
n
Hide Unassigned Antennas
To refresh antenna patterns n
In the Project Explorer , in thechoose Project Data category, right-click Antenna Files and Refresh .
Mentum Planet User Guide 90
Chapter 4
To rename antenna patterns 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Project Data category, right-click Antenna Files and choose Rename.
2
Type a new name for the antenna pattern. The name of the antenna pattern displayed in the Project Explorer changes as does the underlying antenna pattern file. When you rename antenna patterns with electrical tilt, you are prompted to confirm how the underlying antenna files will be renamed.
NOTE: You can only renam e unassigned anten na patterns.
To remove an antenna pattern f rom the Project Explorer n
In the Project Explorer , in the Project Data categor y, expand the Antenna Files node, right-click an antenn a and choose Delete .
While the antenna pattern is removed fr om the Project Explorer , the antenna file is not deleted. NOTE: You can only remove unassign ed antenna patter ns from a project.
91 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Antenna Systems
Grouping antenna patterns In the Project Explorer, you can group antenn a patterns based on the following criteria to make them easier to find: n
horizontal beamwidth
n
vertical beamwidth
n
n
gain front-to-back ratio
n
frequency
n
manufacturer
Within the Antenn a Files node, a new node is created for each grou p of antennas, as shown in Figure 4.5.
Figure 4.5: Antenna patterns grouped by gain.
Mentum Planet User Guide 92
Chapter 4
To group antenna patterns n
In the Project Explorer , in the Project Data category, right-click Antenna Files, choose Group By, and then choose the type of grouping that you want.
The antenna patterns are listed based on the type of grouping you chose.
To ungroup antenna patterns n
In the Project Explorer , in the Project Data category, right-click Antenna Files and choose Group By ► None.
The antenna patterns are now listed in order of name.
93 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Antenna Systems
Using antenna queries You can create queries to identify antennas based on a defined criteria.
To create and run a new antenna query 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Project Data category, rightclick Antenna Queries and choose New.
2
In the Add New Antenna Query dialog box, type a descriptive name for the query and click OK. The Antenna Query Editor opens and a new node is created in the Project Explorer.
3
In the Query Clauses section of the Antenna Query Editor, choose the elements of the query from the following list: n
And/Or—displays chosen condition . Choose “And” when all clauses must be satisfied. Choose “Or” when only one clause need be met.
n
Field —displays the antenna parameters upon which you can
n
Operator—displays available operators.
base the query.
n
4
Value—displays the value that must be satisfied. Depending on the field, the value may initially display a default.
To modify the query, click any of the following buttons: n
n
n
Add—to add a new row to the Query Clauses table. Delete —to remove the selected row from the Query Clauses table. Group—to group the selected clauses. When clau ses are grouped, all the selected c onditions must be met fir st. A red bracket in the second column encompasses the clauses in the group.
n
Ungroup—to ungroup the selected clauses.
Mentum Planet User Guide 94
Chapter 4
The example in the following figure shows a query that selects antennas that support MIMO and/or electrical tilts. Notice that the full query is displayed in the Query box at the bottom of the Antenna Query Editor.
5
To generate query results, click Run Query. The number of antennas that satisfy the query results is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the Antenn a Query Editor. If the number is greater than zero, an Antenna Query Results dialog box opens and displays details about the selected antennas.
6 7
Click Close to close the Antenna Query Results dialog box. In the Antenna Query Editor, click one of the following buttons: n
n
OK—to save your changes and close the Antenna Query Editor. Cancel —to close the Antenna Query Editor without saving your changes.
NOTE: To change an existing query: in the Project Explorer, in the Project Data category, right-click the query and choose Edi t.
NOTE: To run an existing query, in the Project Explorer, in the Project Data category, right-click the query and choose Report Previewer.
95 Mentum Planet User Guide
Chapter 5 Managing Survey Data You can use survey data to accurately analyze the network based on information from the field. This chapter describ es how to import and add survey data, work with survey statisti cs, and create a new survey. This chapter covers the following topics:
Unde rstandingsurve ys
97
Workflowforsurve ys
99
Colle ctingsurve ydata
100
Addingsurve ys toaproject
101
Adding surve y he ader information
105
Saving a copy oa fsurve y
106
Displayingsurveydata Viewingstsautrvey istics
107 111
Assigning surveys Cre atingsurveyreports Modifying surved yata Combiningandcomparingsurve ys
117 121 122 130
Mentum Planet User Guide 96
Chapter 5
Understanding surveys Surveying involves c ollecting signal strength values at small intervals, including many samples from all clutter classes wherever possib le. For best results, the raw data collected must be modified to filter unrepresentative points and average duplicate points. Using Mentum Planet, you can work with and analyze survey data. Survey data can greatly increase the accuracy of predictions. For information on merged pred ictions that combine survey data with prediction outp uts, see the appropriate User Guide for the technology you are using. After you import or add a survey to a project, you can modify the properties of the survey and choose different methods of viewing the survey data in a Map window. You can also view statisti cal data abou t the survey. Based on th ese statistics, you can choose to create a new sur vey by averaging, filtering, combining, or comparing existing survey data.
How survey data is organized in the Project Explorer When you add or im port survey data, it is added to the Survey Data nod e in the Project Explorer und er one of the following categories: n
n
n
Surveys RSSI—contains surveys with valid antenna inform ation Surveys Delta —contains surveys that measure d ifferences, such as those you create when comparing surveys Surveys Other—contains surveys with data other than RSSI values
Once a s urvey is added to the proj ect, the status of the survey is identified using the following icon colors: n
n
n
Dimmed Icons —identify valid surveys that have not been assigned to a sector. Blue Icons —identify valid surveys that have been assigned to a sector. Gray Icons With R ed X —identify surveys that have invalid parameters or no antenna information. By adding antenna information to surveys based on the sec tor properties, you can
97 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Survey Data
change an invalid survey to a valid one. For more information, see “Adding survey header information”. Figure 5.1 shows the Survey Data node in the Project Explor er. In this example, survey GS040_1 has been as signed, survey GS040_2 is valid but has not been assigned, and survey GS040_3 is invalid.
Figure 5.1: Survey Data node in the Project Explorer.
Mentum Planet User Guide 98
Chapter 5
Workflow for surveys
Step 1
Determine the sites from w hich you want to collect data and pl an the survey routes.
Step 2
Collect the survey data.
Step 3
Import the survey data into Men tum Planet or add survey data to the project.
Step 4
If required, modify the properties of the surveys that you h ave imported or added.
Step 5
Assign surveys to sectors.
Step 6
Edit survey data to remove anomalous points (e.g., points that are very close to the site, points where the survey route passes under a bridge or where it goes over water). Survey data should also be averaged in or der to account for Rayleigh fading.
Step 7
Combine and compare surveys in order to better understand survey data.
99 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Survey Data
Collecting survey data When collecting sur vey data, you should collect data for on e sector at a time to avoid introducing errors that arise from signals from other sectors. You should also collect a statistically meaningful number of samples from all clutter classes and cover both flat and hilly areas. For the CRC-Predict model, for example, 100 aggregated data points is the minimum number of points for the analysis to be statistically sign ificant. The more sample points you coll ect, the more accurate the data. The following are some general guidelin es for collecting survey data: n
n
n
n
n
Select sites where you are certain th at the antenna/sector characteristics and location coordinates are well documented, and avoid sites with very high gain antennas where possible. Select sites that are free from n ear-field obstructions when outside a dense urban environment. Drive regular grid patterns, avoiding elevated highways or roads. Ensure that the distribution of data extends a reasonable distance from the site. You should collect data outside the expected effective range of the site, because it is important to collect data at values where coverage is questionable and to verify the border or edge of the cove rage, and to accurately predict interference to other cells. Take samples in all clutter classes and include representative samples in each drive as much as possible.
For best results, it is recommended that survey data be collected using a CW (continuous wave) transmitter with an omni test antenna.
Mentum Planet User Guide 100
Chapter 5
Adding surveys to a project You can add a survey directly to the project if it is in a MapInfo table (.tab) format and it is mappable (i.e., you must be able to view the survey points in a Map window). If the survey data is not in MapInfo table format, you can import the survey and convert it from the following formats into MapInfo table format: n
Microsoft® Excel—A Microsoft Excel format (.xls) survey file consists of a minimu m of three columns with latitu de, longitude, and signal strength values specified. It does not c ontain a header r ow. You can select multiple Microsoft Excel format survey files to import, but all of the files must use the same column settings.
n
n
ASCII text—An ASCII text format (.txt) s urvey file has flexible delimiters, and consists of a minimum of three column s with latitude, longitude, and signal streng th values specified . It also contains a header row. You can choose multiple ASCII text format survey files to impor t, but all of the files must use the same column settings. Data Manager Server files—A Data Manag er Server or 2.8 format survey file consists of a header file and a results file. The results file must be in the same folder as the header file or in a results folder at the same level as the folder that contains the header files. If you want to use Data Manager Server or 2.8 format survey files in merged predictions, you need to import them so that they are available as MapInfo tables.
To ensure that the survey data you add is valid, the survey must contain a min imum of three columns with latitude, longitude, and signal strength values specified . The columns must be in this order. The data in additional colum ns is added or imported if the columns come after these first three. The names of the columns are not taken into ac count when adding or importing. For example, the first three column s could be named “x”, “y”, and “RSSI” or “1”, “2”, an d “3”. If required, you can also modify sur vey properties such as survey date, operator, and antenna information.
101 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Survey Data
Before you import a s urvey, ensure that you: n
n
Check the projection that is specified in the survey file. B y default, the Latitude/Lon gitude projection value is WGS84. Specify a valid projection or the data will not be positioned correctly in the survey when you import the data. Check the survey data f or integrity. Problems in the data may not be easily visib le. For example, check tha t the sector , its power, and its antenna are correct.
To add surveys to the project 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, right-click Survey Data and choose Add.
2
In the Add Survey (Planet Format) dialog box, choose one or more surveys that you want to include in your pr oject, and click Open. The surveys are added to the Survey Data node in the Project Explorer.
NOTE: For more information on creatin g survey points in a Map wind ow, see the MapInfo Professional User Guide.
To import surveys 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, right-click Survey Data , choose Import, and then choose the format of the survey that you want to import.
2
In the Open dialog box, navigate to the file that you want to import, and click Open.
3
Do one of the following: n
If you are importing a survey in ASCI I format, define delimiter and projection settings in the ASCII Import Parameters dialog box, and click OK.
Mentum Planet User Guide 102
Chapter 5
n
n
If you are importing a survey in Excel format, define named range and projection settings in the Excel Import Parameters dialog box, and click OK. If you are importing a Planet DMS survey, define the projection parameters, and click OK.
The survey is added to the Survey Data node in the Project Explorer.
To modify the properti es of a survey 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, rightclick a survey and choose Properties. The Properties dialog box opens.
2
Do any of the following: n
n
To modify the general properties of the survey, including assignments, modify the values in the General section. To modify the antenna information about the sec tor from which the survey was created, modify the values in the Antenna Information section.
For more information on the fields and options in the Properties dialog box, press the F1 key.
3
Click OK.
103 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Survey Data
If you want to use the survey in merg ed predictions, ensure that you have provided the following information in the Antenna Information section: n
n
A name for the antenn a in the Name box. The name must match an antenna available in Mentum Planet. A value for antenn a power in the Power box
NOTE: If you want to use a merged prediction with the Mod el Tuning tool, all antenna parameters must be valid. For more information on merged predictions, see the appropriate User Guide for the technology you are using.
TIP: To delete a survey, in the Project Explorer, in the Operational Data category, right-click a survey, and choose Delete.
Mentum Planet User Guide 104
Chapter 5
Adding survey header information You can update survey header information using the antenna properties of a sector in your project. You can update existing survey header infor mation or add information to surveys that have invalid or missing header infor mation.
To update survey header information using sector properties 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites categor y, choose the sector that you want to use to update the surveys. The sector is highlighted in the Project Explorer.
2
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, choose one or more surveys that you want to update, right-click one of the surveys, and then choose Generate Header From Sector . The Generate Survey Headers dialog box opens, showing the sec tor that will be used and the surveys that will be updated.
3
If you want to view or edit the sector data that will be added to the surveys, click View/Edit Data, modify the information in the Properties dialog box as required, and then click OK. For more information on the fields and options in the Properties dialog box, press the F1 key.
4
In the Generate Survey Headers dialog box, click OK. The sector information is added to the surveys. The survey icon chang es from red to dimmed if the survey srcinally contained invalid header or antenna information.
105 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Survey Data
Saving a copy of a survey You can save a copy of a survey with a new name.
To save a copy of a survey 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, right-click a survey and choose Save Copy As .
2
In the Save As dialog box, navigate to the folder where you want to save the file, type a name for the file in the File Name box, and click Save .
Mentum Planet User Guide 106
Chapter 5
Displaying survey data After you import or add a survey, you can choose different methods of displayin g survey data. You can view the sur vey data points in th e Map window, locate and zoom in on survey data points, browse longitude, latitude, and signal strength values for each point in the survey, or create and view a thematic map of th e survey data.
To view a survey in the Map window n
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Survey Data node, right-click a survey and choose View.
Each survey data point is displayed in the Map window using the default symbol and color as shown in " Survey data displayed in the Map window using the default symbol and color." below .
Figure 5.2: Survey data displayed in the Map w indow using the default symbol and color. TIP: To clear the survey display in the Map window, choose File then choose the survey from the Close Tables list, and click Close.
107 Mentum Planet User Guide
Close Table,
Managing Survey Data
To find survey data points in the Map window After you view the survey data in a Map w indow, you can use the Locate function to zoom in on it. n
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Survey Data node, right-click a survey and choose Locate.
The survey data is centered in the Map window and the Map window zooms in on it. NOTE: To display the location of the transmittin g antenna (as defined in the survey properties), right-click a survey and choose View Transmitting Location.
To view survey data in tabular format n
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Survey Data node, right-click a survey and choose Browse.
The Browser window opens containing the data used in the survey.
Mentum Planet User Guide 108
Chapter 5
To create a thematic map of survey data n
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, rightclick the surveys you want to view and choose Thematic Map .
The thematic map is displayed in the Map window as shown in
Figure 5.3.
Figure 5.3: Survey data points shown as a thematic map. For more information on thematic maps, see t he MapInfo Professional User Guide. When you create and view a thematic map of the sur vey data, the standard color profile s elected for s ignal s trength grids is automatically applied. For more information, see the appropriate User Guide for the technology you are using.
To modify display options for thematically mapped surveys You can modify the display options when thematicall y mapping surveys. You can change both the color profile used and the symbol point size. By default, surveys are thematically mapped using the color prof ile defined for sign al strength files. You can use a different color profile for surveys beneath the Surveys Delta node and the Surveys Other node but you cannot change the color profile for surveys beneath the Surveys RSSI node.
109 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Survey Data
1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, right-click Survey Data and choose Options. The Survey Data Options dialog box opens.
2
To change the size of the survey point display symbol in the Map window, type the new size in the Symbol Size box.
3
To define a different color profile to use when thematically mapping surveys beneath the Surveys Delta node, click Browse next to the Surveys Delta Color Profile box, navigate to the folder that contains the color profile that you want to use, and then click Open.
4
To define a different color profile to use when thematically mapping surveys beneath the Surveys Other node, click Browse next to the Surveys Other Color Profile box, navigate to the folder that contains the color profile that you want to use, and then click Open.
5
Click OK.
Mentum Planet User Guide 110
Chapter 5
Viewing survey statistics You can view statistics about the collected sample points in one or multiple surveys. Statistics are generated using the following types of graphs: n
Survey Histogram—displays the points of the signal strength survey data in a histogram an d a cumulative histogr am. You can also view the mean, standard deviation, and the root mean square (RMS) of the points.
n
n
Survey Clutter Distribution—displays the number of points of the survey data by clutter class in a stacked format. Survey Regression Analysis—displays the points of signal strength mapped versus the distance to the antenna with either a userdefined or Lee model regression line. You can also edit some of the regression parameters and view a Free Space curve.
These graphs enable you to view statistics of multiple surveys simultaneously. This is useful when you want to compare statistics on survey data before you average, filter, compare, or combine it.
To view a survey histogram 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, choose the surveys that you want to view in a histogram.
2
Right-click and choose Analyz e
Hist ogram .
The Survey Histogram d ialog box opens, displaying a histogram for the chosen surveys.
111 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Survey Data
3
Choose any of the following options to view statistics: n
n
n
n
To view a symbol at each data poin t in the histogram, enable the Show Points check box. To view a cumulative histogram for multiple surveys, enable the Cumulative Data check box. To view horizontal grid lines, enable the Show Horizontal Grid check box. To view vertical grid lines, enable the Show Vertical Grid check box.
4
To save the statistics in a text (.txt) file, click Save, navigate to the folder where you want to save the file, type the file name, and then click Save.
5
Click Close .
To view a survey clutter distribution histogram 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, choose the surveys that you want to view in a clutter distribution histogram.
Mentum Planet User Guide 112
Chapter 5
2
Right-click one of the surveys and choose Analyz e Distribution.
Clutt er
The Survey Clutter D istribution dialog box opens, displaying a clutter distribution histogram for two surveys.
3
Do any of the following: n
n
To view the number of survey sample poin ts collecte d for each clutter class by percentage, enable the Show% Of Points check box. To view the number of survey sample poin ts collecte d for each clutter class, enable the Label Columns check box.
4
To save the statisti cs in a text (.txt) file, click Save , navigate to the folder where you want to save the file, type the file name, and then click Save.
5
Click Close .
To view a survey regression analysis You can view a regression curve of surveys that have valid antenna files.
113 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Survey Data
1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, choose the surveys that you want to view in a regression histogram.
2
Right-click one of the surveys and choose Analyze Regression. The Survey Regression Analysis dialog box opens, displaying a regression curve for two surveys.
3
Click Curves. The Curve Parameters dialog box opens.
Mentum Planet User Guide 114
Chapter 5
4
To manually define the curve, do any of the following in the boxes in the User Defined section: n
n
n
5
n
n
To save the curve using th e values in the Best Fit section, choose the Best Fit option. To save the curve using th e values in the User Defined section, choose the User Defined option.
To draw a curve using the values in the Best Fit section , enable the Best Fit check box. To draw a curve using the values in the User Defined section, enable the User Defined check box.
If you want to draw a free space curve on the regression graph, enable the Draw Free Space Curve check box in the Free Space Loss Curve section, and do any of the fol lowing: n
n
8
In the Slope box, type the value of the logarithmic regression curve slope, expressed as dB/Dist for a linear regr ession or dB/Decade for a logarithmic regression.
In the Draw Curve section, do any of the following: n
7
In the Intercept Distance box, type the value of the signal strength at which the regression curve starts.
In the Selected Curve section, do any of the following to generate the values saved with the survey points when you click Save in the Survey Regression Analysis dialog box: n
6
In the Intercept box, type the value of the signal strength at the intercept distance.
To define the power wi th which to draw the fr ee s pace line, type a value in EIRP dBm in the Power box. To define the freq uency with which to define the free space line, type a value in MHz in the Frequency box.
Click OK to close the Curve Parameters dialog box.
115 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Survey Data
9
To view the regression graph using a linear instead of a logarithmic scale, clear the Use Log Scale check box.
10 To save the statistics in a text (.txt) file, click Save, navigate to the folder where you want to save the file, type the file name, and then click Save.
11 Click Close.
Mentum Planet User Guide 116
Chapter 5
Assigning surveys After you add a survey and mod ify its properties, you can assign the survey to a sector. You must assign the appropriate survey to the correspon ding sector. When you create merged pr edictions, these ass ignments determine the survey that will be used when updating a prediction for a site.
To assign a survey to a sector n
Do one of the follow ing: n
n
In the Project Explorer , drag a survey from the Operational Data category to a sector in the Sites category. Use a s urvey assignment file to associate multip le surveys with multiple sectors.
When a survey is assigned to a sector, the survey icon tur ns blue.
To create a survey assignment file A survey assignment file is a text file that defines the surveys that are associated with each sector.
1
Create the survey assignm ent file in a text editor using the following conventions: n
The first line is a header and must c ontain the follo wing text:
HEADER Planet EV 3.1 SPT Assignments file Version 1.0 n
Subsequent lines use the following format:
CELLID : For example: CELLID Site_44:3 survey_1164 If you are assigni ng multiple surveys t o a sec tor, separate the survey file names with a comma.
117 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Survey Data
2
When you have completed assigning all of the surveys, save the file as a text file.
To assign multiple surveys using an assignme nt file 1
In the Project Explorer, in the Operational Data category, right-click Survey Data and choose Assi gnment Assi gn From File . The Assign From File dialog box opens.
2
In the Survey Assignment section, choose one of the follo wing options: n
Assign Surveys In File —adds assignments from All the chosen survey assignm ent file tosurvey the sectors in a pr oject. existing survey assignments are retained. n
3
4
Reassign All Surveys —deletes any existing survey assignments and assigns the surveys from the chosen survey assignment file.
In the Assignment File section , click Browse, choose the assignment file that you want to use, and click Open. Click OK. The Assignment Report dialog box opens.
5
Do one of the following: n
Review the report and click Close without saving the report to a file.
Mentum Planet User Guide 118
Chapter 5
n
6
If you want to save the report, in the Save Report As dialog box, do the following: n
n
n
7
Click Save As to save the report.
From the Save In list, choose the folder to which you want the file saved. In the File Name box, type a name for the report. Click Save .
In the Assignment Report dialog box, click Close .
To view and update survey assignments 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites categor y, right-click a site or a sector and choose Surve ys Ass igned Surve ys . The Assigned Surveys dialog box opens.
2
To unassign a survey from the sector, clear the check box n ext to the survey.
3
Click OK.
To export a survey assignment file You can export a survey as signment file that contains the current assignm ents. This is useful if you have assigned surveys by dragging and dropping them onto sectors, and you want to save the assignments.
119 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Survey Data
1
In the Project Explorer, in the Operational Data category, right-click Survey Data and choose Ass ignme nt Sav e To File .
2
In the Save Assignment File As dialog box, navigate to the folder where you want to save the file, type a name for the file, and click Save . You can save the file with any extension.
To clear all survey assignments 1
In the Project Explorer, in the Operational Data category, right-click Survey Data and choose Ass ignme nt Clea r All Assignments.
2
In the confirmation dialog box, click Ye s.
Mentum Planet User Guide 120
Chapter 5
Creating survey reports You can create a numb er of reports that enable you to view survey assignments. You have the following options for reports: n
n
n
By Site/Sector—lists any sectors that h ave surveys assigned to them and identifies the survey By Survey—lists t he available surveys and iden tifies which sector each survey is assigned to By Prediction—lists surveys in one of three categories according to whether the survey metadata is correct:
n
Valid Assigned Surveys
n
Assigned Surveys Missing Metadata
n
Unassigned Surveys
To create survey assignment reports 1
2
In the Project Explorer, in the Operational Data category, rightclick Survey Data , choose Reports, and then choose one of the following: n
By Site/Sector
n
By Survey
n
By Prediction
In the Survey Report dialog box, do one of the following: n
n
If you want to save the repor t, click Save As, an d in the Save Report As dialog box, navigate to the folder where you want to save the file, type a name for the file, click Save, and then click Close . If you do not want to save the repor t, click Close .
121 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Survey Data
Modifying survey data After adding or importing a s urvey, you can modify survey data to remove anomalous survey points and account for Rayleig h fading. This creates a new survey that more closely resembles the topography and clutter along the survey route. To this end, you can: n
average survey data. See “To average survey data” .
n
filter survey data using one of three metho ds: n
n
n
n
By creating survey filters using the Su rvey Filtering dialog box where you can view a graph display of survey points and create, edit, and save survey filters. See “To filter survey data” . By filtering survey points based on the points selected in the Map window. See “To filter survey data by select ion”. By filtering survey points based on a p olygon selected in the Map window. See “To filter survey data by polygon”.
remove data from the Map window. See “To remove survey data points from the Map window”.
To average survey data 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operation Data category, choose the surveys th at you want to average.
2
Right-click one of the surveys and choose Analyz e
Ave rage .
The Survey Averaging dialog box opens.
Mentum Planet User Guide 122
Chapter 5
3
In the Rayleigh Fading Distance box, type a value or accept the default. To remove Rayleigh fading, the recommended aggregation distance is 40 wavelengths. For example, 13 m at 900 MHz, and 5 m at 2400 M Hz. The resulting survey will have data points spaced no closer than the specified distance, and the signal streng th values will be the median of signal strengths in the srcinal survey within this distance. The points to aggreg ate are selected using the Distance method in Step 4.
4
In the Averaging section, choose one of the follow ing options to average data points: n
n
Area Method— Data points are averaged using the median by dividing the area covered by the point file into adjacent squares in a rectangular array. The sides of the s quares have the length defined in the Averaging Distance box. The points that fall inside any of these squares are averaged to create one point at the geocenter of the averaged points (not at the c enter of the square). The averaging areas do not depend on the distribution of points in the srcinal survey. Distance Method— Data points are averaged using the median by dividing the area covered by the point file into circles that may overlap, but which include all of the points in the srcin al survey. (Points in the overlapping areas are assigned to only one circle.) The diameters of the circles are defined in the Averaging Distance box. The points that fall inside any of these circles are averaged to create one point at the geocenter of the averaged points (not at the center of the circle). The averaging areas do depend on the distrib ution of points in the srcinal survey.
123 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Survey Data
Either method can be used for any survey, but there may be a slight advantage in using the Area method for a survey done on a rectangular grid of roads, and the Distance method for more randomly distributed survey points.
5
To define the minimum separation allowed between data points, type a value in the Averaging Distance box, or accept the default, which is the elevation grid resolu tion. This second level of aggregation is used to remove signal strength variations due to shadowing by buildings and other objects smaller than the grid resolution. Averaging by Distance is not necessary for deterministic, urban models because the prediction r esolution is close to the value in the Rayleigh Fading box. If you do not require this second aggregation, set the Averaging Distance to be equal or less than the Rayleigh Fading Distance.
6
Do one of the following: n
n
If you averaged one survey, type a name for the new survey in the Survey Name box. If you averaged multiple surveys, type a suffix for the new survey in the Survey Suffix box. Each survey that you average will be created as a new survey, with the original name and the suffix that you define.
7
Click OK. The new survey is added to the Survey Data node in the Project Explorer.
To filter survey data 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, choose the surveys that you want to filter.
2
Right-click one of the surveys and choose Analyz e
Fi lte r .
The Survey Filtering dialog box opens.
Mentum Planet User Guide 124
Chapter 5
3
From the Filter Type list, choose the type of filter that you want to use. For information on the types of filters available, press the F1 key.
4
Click in the Minimum and Maximum fields and type new values to specify the range of points to be saved. Survey sample points below the defined minimum value and above the defined maximum value are removed from the resulting survey. For the Clutter Class and Line of Sig ht filters, you can only choose the type of points that you want to remove.
5
In the Filters sectio n, click Apply. The Removed and Remaining fields update to display the number of data points that have been filtered out of the survey and the number of data points remaining in the survey.
6
Click Curves. The Curve Parameters dialog box opens.
7
To manually define the curve, do any of the following in the User Defined section: n
In the Intercept box, type the value of the signal strength at the intercept distance.
125 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Survey Data
n
n
8
In the Intercept Distance box, type the value of the signal strength at which the regression curve starts. In the Slope box, type the value of the logarithmic regression curve slope, expressed as dB/Dist for a lin ear regression or dB/Decade for a logarithmic regression.
In the Selected Curve s ection, do any of the foll owing to generate the values saved with the survey points when you apply the Distance From Reg. Line filter type in the Survey Filtering dialog box: n
n
9
To draw a curve using the values in the Best Fit section, choose the Best Fit option. To draw a curve using the values in the User Defined section, choose the User Defined option.
In the Draw Curve section, do any of the following: n
n
To draw a curve using the values in the Best Fit section, enable the Best Fit check box. To draw a curve using the values in the User Defined section, enable the User Defined check box.
10 If you want to draw a free space curve on the regression gr aph, enable the Draw Free Space Curve check box in the Free Space Loss Curve section, and do any of the fol lowing: n
n
To define the power with w hich to draw the free space line, type a value in EIRP dBm in the Power box. To define the freq uency with which to defin e the free s pace line, type a value in MHz in the Frequency box.
11 Click OK to close the Curve Parameters dialog box. 12 To view the results in a graphical format, choose one of the following formats from the Graph Display list: n
Histogram —displays a histogram of the sample points contained in the chosen survey. The X-axis displays the rang e
Mentum Planet User Guide 126
Chapter 5
of signal strengths found in the chosen survey and the Y-axis displays the number of sample points collected for each signal strength. n
n
n
Cumulative Histogram —displays a cumulative histogram of the sample points contained in the chosen surveys. The X-axis displays the range of signal strengths found in the chosen survey and the Yaxis displays the cumulative sum of the number of sample points collected for each signal strength. Distance Plot —displays a graph of Signal Strength and Distance for the sample points in a chosen survey Clutter Distribution—displays a graph of survey sample points and the clutter classes from which they were collected
13 To view the regression graph using a linear instead of a logari thmic scale, clear the Use Log Scale check box. This option is only available if you have chosen the Distance Plot format from the Graph Display list.
14 Click Save, and do one of the following: n
n
If you filtered one survey, in the Filtered Survey Name dialog box, type a name for the new survey in the Survey Name box. If you filtered multiple surveys, in the Filtered Survey Name Suffix dialog box, type a suffix for the new survey in the Survey Suffix box. Each survey that you filter will be created as a new survey, with the srcinal name and the suffix that you define.
15 Click Close . The new survey is added to the Survey Data node in the Project Explorer.
To filter survey data by selection 1
In the Map window, using any of the Select tools on the Main toolbar, select survey data points from the survey that you want to filter.
2
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, choose the survey that you want to filter.
3
Right-click the survey and choose Analyze
127 Mentum Planet User Guide
Fil ter From Selec tion .
Managing Survey Data
The Filtered Survey Name dialog box opens.
4
Type a name for the new survey in the Survey Name box.
5
Click OK. The new survey is added to the Survey Data node in the Project Explorer.
To filter survey data by polygon 1
In the Map window, using the Polygon tool on the Drawing toolbar, draw a polygon object aroun d the survey data points in the survey you want to filter.
2
In the Map window, using the Select tool on the Main toolbar, select the polygon object.
3
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, choose the surveys that you want to filter.
4
Right-click one of the surveys and choose Analyz e From Polygon .
5
Do one of the following: n
n
6
Fi lte r
If you filtered one su rvey, in the Filtered Survey Name dialog box, type a name for the new survey in the Survey Name box. If you filtered multiple surveys, in the Filtered Survey Name Suffix dialog box, type a suffix for the new survey in the Survey Suffix box. Each survey that you filter will be created as a new survey, with the original name and the suffix that you define.
Click OK. The new survey is added to the Survey Data node in the Project Explorer.
Mentum Planet User Guide 128
Chapter 5
To remove survey data points from the Map window Using RF knowledge, you may want to remove additional survey data points.
1
Click the Zoom-in button on the Main toolbar and zoom in to the area where you want to remove survey points.
2
In the Windows category of the Project Explorer , expand the Windows node, and then expan d the Map Windows node.
3
Right-click the survey and choose Editable if the layer is not already editable. A check mark next to Editable indicates that the survey can be modified.
4
Click the Select button on the Main toolbar.
5
Click in the Map window to select the survey p oints you want to remove.
6
Press the Delete key.
7
When you have finished deleting survey points, choose GIS
Sav e
Table to save the updated survey. NOTE: You can use any of th e MapInfo select tools to selec t points in the Map window. See the MapInfo Professional User Guide or online Help.
129 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Survey Data
Combining and comparing surveys You can combine two surveys together if you have two surveys that overlap and you need only one survey for the entire area. You can compare: n
n
n
two surveys and gener ate a new survey that represents the difference of the two. See “To compare two surveys” . a survey with a numeric grid to create a new survey. See “To compare a survey with a numeric grid” . a survey with a model prediction to create a new sur vey. See “To compare a survey with a modeled prediction” .
These comparisons are useful when you want to determine if the predicted signal strength data is relevant based on the actual signal strength data from the field.
To combine surveys 1
In the Project Explorer, in the Operational Data category, choose the surveys that you want to combine.
2
Right-click one of the surveys and choose Analyz e
Co mbine .
The Combine Surveys dialog box opens.
3
From the Use Header From list, choose the survey that contains the header information that you want to use to create the new survey.
4
Type a name for the new survey in the Output Survey Name box.
Mentum Planet User Guide 130
Chapter 5
5
Click OK. The new survey is added to the Survey Data node in the Project Explorer.
To compare two surveys The results of the comparison will be more useful if you compare surveys that are located beneath the same survey node in the Survey Data node.
1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, choose the surveys that you want to compare.
2
Right-click one of the surveys and choose Analyz e Surveys.
Compare Two
The Compare Two Surveys dialog box opens.
3
From the Reference Survey list, choose the survey that contains the reference data. The Comparison Survey field updates to display the second survey. The data from the Comparison Survey is subtracted from the data in the Reference Survey.
4
In the Survey Interpolation Distance box, type a value to define the distance of the radius around each reference point of the Reference Survey. The distance units that are displayed are defined on the Units pane in the User Preferences dialog box.
131 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Survey Data
5
In the Max Number Of Interpolation Points box, type a value to define the maximum number of points from the radius around each reference point that will be included in the comparison. If you define the maximum number of points as 1, the closest point from the radius is included in the comparison. If you define the maximum number of interpolation points as 10, but there are 100 points within the radius, the 10 points that are closest t o the reference point are retained and averaged. The remaining 90 points are discarded.
6
7
In the Delta Survey Name box, type a name for the new survey. Click OK. The new survey is added to the Survey Delta node in the Survey Data node.
To compare a survey with a numeric grid You can compare a survey with the following types of numeric grids: n
Signal strength layers—compar e an RSSI survey with the predicted signal strength of a propagation model. Signal strength layers are located in the SignalStrength folder of the project.
n
Analysis layers—compar e an RSSI survey with a Best Server RSSI analysis layer, or an RxQual survey with a predicted RxQual analysis layer. Analysis layer fi les are located in the _Analyses folder of the project. For more information, see the appropriate User Guide for the technology you are using.
For information on the c alculations used in the comparison , see “ Chapter 11: Working with Network and Project Data”.
1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, right-click a survey and choose Analyze Compare To Grid .
Mentum Planet User Guide 132
Chapter 5
2
In the Compare Survey To Grid dialog box, navigate to the folder that contains the numer ic grid that you want to compare, and click Open. The Survey to Grid Comparison dialog box opens.
3
To save the new survey, click Save, type a name for th e survey, and then click OK. The new survey is added to the Surveys Delta node in the Survey Data node.
To compare a survey with a modeled prediction You can create a delta survey showing a comparison between survey values and modeled prediction values. Values in the delta survey are c alculated by subtr acting the model prediction values from the survey values (i.e., survey values - modeled prediction values). A positive value indicates that the predi cted grid value is les s than the survey value.
1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, rightclick a survey and choose Analyze Compare To Modeled Prediction.
2
If the survey is assig ned to more than one sector, in the Choose Sector dialog box, choose the sector that you want to use for the comparison, and click OK.
133 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Survey Data
A series of tabbed charts opens, including a tab for Compare to Modeled Prediction.
3
To save the new survey, click Save, type a name for the survey, and then click OK. The new survey is added to the Surveys Delta node in the Survey Data node .
Mentum Planet User Guide 134
Chapter 6 Managing Test Mobile Data Test mobile data consists of data relating to calls made by the mobile and general network measurements collected by it along a defined route over a period of time. A test mobile is a functioning phone and collects data about an actual phone call/data ses sion. The test mobile data featur es of Mentum Planet are part of the AMDP module. This chapter covers the following topics:
Unde rstanding te st mobile data
137
Workflow forte stmobile data
139
Importingtestmobiledata
140
View ing info rmation about a test mobile data file
145
Vie wing and locating te st mobile data
146
Displaying test mobile data in a Map win dow
149
Vie wing test mobile data in graph format
158
Allocating t est mobile data to se ctors
162
Exporting test mobile datatosurveys
169
Mentum Planet User Guide 136
Chapter 6
Understanding test mobile data Test mobile equipment enables network operators to collect reporting and measurement data. Typically, test mobile equipment takes measurements along a defined route over a period of time. The use of test mobile equipment in operational cellular networks is a common network optimization practice. Test mobile data consists of records organized into colum ns. Mentum Planet enables you to work with and analyze test mobile data to increase the accuracy of predictions. For example, you can compare a test mobile value against network analysis layers that contain th e same value, or you can export test mobile data to a survey and use the survey to increase the accuracy of Mentum Planet predictions. NOTE: For information on merged predi ctions that combine survey data with prediction outputs, see “Choosing a prediction mo de”.
Input file requirements for test mobile data Test mobile data that you want to import into Mentum Planet must: n
n
n
n
n
use a technology that is supported by Mentum Planet and is enabled in your project overlap the heights file for the project be in text (.txt or .csv) for mat contain data from only one test mobile (if you have combined data from multiple test mobiles, the test mobile tool will not distingui sh between the measurements taken by each one, and will treat the data as though it came from a single test mobile) contain the followin g information in each record: n
n
n
latitude or northing longitude or easting signal strength (RSSI or equivalent), if you want to export the data to a survey
Test mobile data file header
137 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Test Mobile Data
Because networks are not static, a test mobile recording is only valid for the network c onfiguration when it was recorded. If any attributes of the network, for example, antennas or power s, are changed, the data ma y be less accura te or invalid. To ensure that the test mobile data is valid, a snapshot is taken of the n etwork configuration at the time the data was collected, and this information (referred to as header information) is recorded along with the test mobile data file.
Mentum Planet User Guide 138
Chapter 6
Workflow for test mobile data
Step 1
Import test mobile data.
Step 2
View the data in a Map window, table, or graph. See
Step 3
n
“Viewing and locating test mobile data”
n
“Viewing test mobile data in graph format”
If you want to export the signal strength values (RSSI or equivalent), do the following: n
Allocate the data to M entum Planet sectors.
n
Export the data to a survey.
139 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Test Mobile Data
Importing test mobile data The Test Mobile Data Import Wizard guides you through the process of importing your test mobile data. As you proceed through the wizard, you must provide the followin g information: n
n
the network technol ogy used in the test mobile data file the file type (delimited text file or comm a-separated value file)
n
the file or files to import
n
the delimiter between columns in the test mobile data file, if applicable
n
the date the test mobile data f ile was created
n
the coordinate system of the test mobile data file
You must also bind the columns in the imported data to fields in Mentum Planet. At a minimum, you must bind latitude and longitude, but you can bind additional columns depending on the technology. Once y ou have bound the columns, you can save the bindi ng information as a template to use again. This is useful for files from the same equipment that have been exported in the same manner.
To import test mobile data This procedure may vary slightly depending on the type of data that you are importing. When binding data using the Test Mobile Wizard, you must choose a value from the list or click the down arrow a second time to close the list.
1
2
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Field Measurement Data node. Right-click Test Mobile, and choose Import. The Test Mobile Data Import Wizard opens.
3
On the Welcome page, click Next.
Mentum Planet User Guide 140
Chapter 6
4
On the Choose A Technology page, choose the techn ology of the test mobile data file and click Next.
5
On the Choose The Type Of The Source Data File page, choose th e file type of the test mobile data file and click Next.
6
On the Choose The Data File(s) You Want To Use page, click Browse, navigate to the test mobile data file or files, click Open, and then click Next.
7
On the Choose The Format Of The Source Data File page, do the following: n
n
n
n
n
n
n
In the Delimiters section, enable one or mor e of the check boxes (Tab, Semicolon, Comma, Space, Other) to identify the delimiters used to separate values in the test mobile data file. If you enabled the Other check box, type a delimiter in the adjacent box. If the test mobile data fil e contains a header row, enable the Us e Header Row check box and, from the Header Row list, choose the row number of the header row. From the Start Import At Row list, choose the row number at which to start the import. This option is useful if your test mobil e data file has comments at the beginning or multiple header rows that do not need to be imported. In the Rows With Invalid Latitude/Longitude section, choose one of the following options to define how to manage invalid coordinates: Discard Row s With Invalid Coord inates —do not import records with invalid latitude and longitude values. Use Value From Last Valid R ecord —copy valid latitude and longitude values from the previous record . The coordinate values 0,0 are used if it is the first record.
The lower part of the page updates to show the results of your choices.
8
Click Next. The Choose How You Want the Data Bound Page opens.
141 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Test Mobile Data
9
For each column that you want to bind, do the following: n
n
Click in the Mentum Planet Field box and, from the list, choose the Mentum Planet field to which you want to bind the test mobile data column. Click in the Data Format row and choose the format for the data. Typically, you will only need to choose a format for latitude, longitude, and BSIC. All other columns offer only one option that is automatically chosen.
At a minimum, you must bind colum ns to the latitude and longi tude fields in Mentum Planet. A green indicator is displayed if the bindi ng is successful and a red indicator if th e binding is unsuccessful. Any columns that y ou do not bind are shown as . You can move the c ursor over the indicator for more information. The Binding Status section displays the available Mentum Planet columns. When the binding is successful, a check mark is displayed. When the binding is unsuccessful, an X is displayed.
10 If you want to use a template to bin d the test mobile data to Mentum Planet fields, click Load Template , navigate to the template file that you want to use, and click Open.
Mentum Planet User Guide 142
Chapter 6
By default, templates are stored in the Test Mobile Data/Template Files folder. Once you load the template, you can modify any of the rows for a single use, save them as a new template, or overwrite the current temp late.
11 If you want to bind mu ltiple columns to a single Mentum Planet field (for example, if you have multiple PN offset columns), do the following: n
n
n
Choose the column s by holding down the Shift or Ctrl key and clicking the column headers. Click Multiple Bindings. In the Bind Multiple Columns dialog box, from the Mentum Planet Field list, choose the Mentum Planet field to which to bind the columns, from the Data Format list, choose the format for the data, and click OK.
12 If you want to s ave the binding information to use with other test mobile data files, click Save As Template , navigate to the folder where you want to save the template, type a name for the bin ding template file in the Name box, and click Save.
13 In the Test Mobile Data Import Wizard , click Next. 14 If you want to modify the file header i nformation, on the Enter Header Information page, do any of the follow ing: n
n
n
n
n
In the Data Name box, type a new name. The default data name is the file name minus the extension. This is the name that will be displayed in the Project Explorer . In the Operator Name box, type the name of the network operator. Click the down arr ow in the Data Date box and choose a different date to apply to the test mobile data file. Beside the Coordinate System box, click Change, and in the Choose Projection dialog box, choose the new projection category and member, and then click OK. In the Comments box, type any additional comments or modify the existing c omments.
15 Click Next.
143 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Test Mobile Data
The Data Import dialog box displays the progress of the import process.
16 On the Choose A Map View Template page, do one of th e following: n
n
n
If you do not want to apply a map view template, choose from the Map View Template list. To use an existing map view templ ate to display data points in the Map window, choose a template from the Map View Template list. To create a new tem plate, click New Template and follow Step 3 to Step 7 in the procedure, “To create a map view template for test mobile data” .
17 Click Next and then click Finish. The test mobile data file is added as a node to the Test Mobile node under the Field Measurement Data node in the Operational Data category of the Project Explorer.
Mentum Planet User Guide 144
Chapter 6
Viewing information about a test mobile data file At any time, you can view inform ation about a test mobile data file, includ ing the following: n
data name
n
data date
n
network technology
n
operator name
n
coordinate system
n
any comments that you have entered ab out the test mobile data file
To view information about a test mobile data file 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Field Measurement Data node, then expa nd the Test Mobile node.
2
Right-click a test mobile data node and choose Properties. The Test Mobile - Data Properties dialog box opens.
3
If you want to modify the information, do any of the following and click OK: n
n
n
Click the down arr ow in the Data Date box and choose a different date to apply to the test mobile data file. In the Operator Name box, type the name of the network operator. In the Comments box, type any additional comments or modify the existing c omments.
145 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Test Mobile Data
Viewing and locating test mobile data After you import a test mobile data file, you can quickly view n
n
the data points (i.e., th e location where each record was captured) in the Map window the test mobile data records in tabular f ormat
NOTE: You can also display the values in individual columns in the Map window, but you must first define the setting s to use for these values. See “Displaying test mobile data in a Map window” .
To view the test mobile data locations in a Map window 1
2
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Field Measurement Data node, then expa nd the Test Mobile node. Right-click a tes t mobile data node and choose View. Each data location is displayed in the Map using a default symbol and color.
To remove the test mobile data from the Map window, right-click the test mobile data node and choose View again.
Mentum Planet User Guide 146
Chapter 6
To find test mobile data in a Map window You can use the Locate function to view and zoom in on the test mobile data in the Map window.
1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Field Measurement Data node, then expa nd the Test Mobile node.
2
Right-click a test mobile data node and choose Locate. The test mobile data is centered in the Map window and the Map window zooms in on it.
To view test mobile data in tabular format 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Field Measurement Data node, then expa nd the Test Mobile node.
2
Right-click a test mobile data node and choose Browse. The Test Mobile Browser window opens containing the test mobile data in tabular format. Any columns that you have bound are identified by a Mentum Planet icon. You can move your cursor over the Mentum Planet icon to view the name of the Mentum Planet field to which the column has been bound.
147 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Test Mobile Data
3
To sort the data, in ascending or descending order, click the header of the column that you wan t to use for sorting. To reverse the order, click the column header ag ain.
4
To filter the data, click the down arrow in the column header that you want to use for filtering and choose the value to display. The name of the filter (the column name plus the value that you chose to display) is shown at the bottom of the dialog box, for example ([Message Type] = ‘Cell Report’).
5
If you filtered the data, in the filter section at the bottom of the dialog box, do any of the following: n
n
To remove the filter temporarily, clear the check box associated with it. To remove the filter completely, click the close button located to the left of the filter name.
Mentum Planet User Guide 148
Chapter 6
Displaying test mobile data in a Map window You can graphically display the data associated with the points in the drive test by defining map view settings for the test mobile data file. Map view settings identify which columns to display and which point display settings to apply to each column.
Understanding point display settings Point display settings define how to pr esent the data in a column. They enable you to define the symbol, size, and color for each value or rang e of values in a column. There are two types of point display settings: n
n
individual—enables you to assign a single symbol and color for a specific value. Use this option for colum ns that contain textual data or that have a limited number of fixed values. For example, if your test mobile data file has a column called Direction with values of Uplink and Downlink, you can as sign a different symbol and color for Uplink and Downlink. ranges—enable you to assign a symbol size to a range of values. Use this option for columns with a high number of individual values. For example, if your test mobile data file has a column for RxLev (the received power l evel), you can assign symbo ls to ranges of RxLev values (e.g., 0-5.6, 5.6-11.2, 11.2-16.6, etc.).
Automatic selection When you define map view settings for a test mobile data file, if you choose to create new point display settings, the Test Mobile tool automaticall y chooses an appropriate point display setting type, and, by default, assigns the column nam e and display values based on the content of the colum n. You can modify these values.
Understanding how display information is organized Test mobile display information is located in three sections under the Field Measurement Data node in the Operational Data category of the Project Explorer: n
Point display se ttings are stored und er the Point Display Setting s node. They are classified as either Local (i.e. , not stored in Data Manager), or Shared (i.e., stored in Data Manager).
149 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Test Mobile Data
n
n
Map view templates, which are groups of point display settings and associated column n ames, are stored under the Map View Templates node under the Test Mobile node. If you have defined map view settings for a test mobil e data file, the names of any columns that have a point display setting assigned to them are displayed under the test mobile data node along with th e name of the point display setting, in the format - . For example, in Figure 6.1, the All-ARFCN TCH column in the TMData test mobile data file is assigned the Channels point display setting.
Figure 6.1 shows the organization of point display and map view settings in the Project Explorer.
Figure 6.1: Point display and m ap view settings in the Project Explorer
To define map view set tings f or a test mobile data file 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Field Measurement Data node, then expa nd the Test Mobile node.
2
Right-click Settings. a test mobile data node and choose Map View
Mentum Planet User Guide 150
Chapter 6
The Map View Setting s dialog box opens. The Map View Setting s dialog box enables you to define point display settings for the columns in your test mobile data file. If you applied a template when you imported the test mobile data file or if you have already defined map view settings for the test mobile data file, the Map View Settings dialog box contains the defined values. Otherwise, it contain s no values.
3
If you want to apply a map view template to the test mobile data, click Load, and in the Load Template dialog box, choose a template from the list and click OK. For information on creating a map view template, see “To create a map view template for test mobile data”.
4
To add a data column from the test mobile data file, click Add. The Column Assignment dialog box opens.
5
From the Data Columns list, choose one or more columns in the test mobile data file that you want to display.
6
Do one of the following: n
From the Point Display Setting list, choose an existing point display setting to ap ply to the test mobile colum n, click OK, and go to Step 10.
n
From the Point Display Setting list, choose Create New Setting , click OK, and go to Step 7. The Test Mobile tool automatically
151 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Test Mobile Data
chooses the correct display setting type or types (individual or ranges) based on the contents of the data column that you chose, and provides a default nam e for the setting.
7
In the New Point Display Settings dialog box, choose a display setting type, type a name or accept the defa ult, and click OK. If the data in the column is textual, only the Individual display se tting type will be availab le. If the data is numeric, all three types will b e available.
8
Click OK.
9
Do one of the following: n
n
If you chose to defin e individual point display settings, see “To define individual point display settings” . If you chose to d efine ranges, see “To define point display settings for ranges of values” .
10 If you want to view the data in the Map window, in the Map View Settings dialog box, choose the point display setting that you want to view and click View. A new layer is added to th e Map window.
11 If you want to save the ma p view settin gs as a templa te, click Save As , and in the Save Template dialog box, type a name for the template, and click OK.
12 When you have finished defining map view settings, in the Map View Settings dialog box, click OK. The names of the columns with point display settings assigned are displayed in the Project Explorer under the test mobile data file (see Figure 6.1). To view them, see “To display the test mobile data points in a Map window”. The point display settings are also added to the Shared node under the Point Display Se ttings node. These s ettings c an be used again for other test mobile or scan receiver data files.
Mentum Planet User Guide 152
Chapter 6
NOTE: You can move point display settings between the Local and Shar ed node by choosing one or more point display settings in the Project Explorer and dragging them to the Local or Shared node.
NOTE: To edit point display settings, under the Local or Shared node, right-click the point display setting and choose Edit.
NOTE: You can also apply a map view te mplate by dragging it onto a test mobile data file in the Project Explorer.
To define individual point display settings When you are defining map view settings for a test mobile data file, the Editing Point Display Settings dialog box is automatically populated with values from the column that you chose.
1
To add a row, in the Editing Point Display Settings dialog box, click Add.
2
To remove a row, choose the row and click Remove . You cannot remove the Default value. This value is used to define displ ay settings for any value that you do not specifically enter.
3
To modify a row, do any of the following: n
n
n
Click in the Name box and type a new column name. If you do not want the valu e to be visible in the Map window, clear the Visible check box. Clearing the Visible check box is useful if you do not want to view points that match this value now, but may want to view them later. To change the symb ol, click in th e Symbol box, and from the list, choose the font, and then choose the individu al symbol, and click OK.
n
Click in the Size box and type or choose the symbol size that you want.
153 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Test Mobile Data
n
4
To modify the color , click in t he Color box and choose the color that you want.
When you have finished defining individual point display settings, in the Editing Point Display Settings dialog box, click OK.
NOTE: You can also define individual point display settings by right-clicking Local or Shared under the Point Display Settings node and choosing New. Then, in the New Point Display Settings dialog box, choose Individu al and click OK. In this case, because you are not defining in dividual point display se ttings based on an existing column, the Editing Point Display Settings dialog box is not automatically popu lated. You must define the values manually.
NOTE: If you define the values manually, you should define them to match the types and ranges of values that are likely to occur in your test mobile data.
To define point display settings for ranges of value s When you are defining map view settings for a test mobile data file, the Editing Point Display Settings dialog box is automatically populated with values from the column that you chose.
1
To add a row, in the Editing Point Display Settings dialog box, click Add.
2
To remove a row, choose the row and click Remove .
3
To modify a row, do any of the following: n
n
n
In the >= Min box, type or choose the minimum value for the range. In the < Max box, type or choose the maximum value for the range. To change the sym bol, click in th e Symbol box, and from the list, choose the font, and then choose the individual symbol, and click OK.
n
Click in the Size box and type or choose the symbol size.
n
To modify the color , click in t he Color box and choose a color.
Mentum Planet User Guide 154
Chapter 6
4
To define ranges automatically, click Auto, and in the Auto Range Settings dialog box, do the following: n
n
In the Minimum and Maximum boxes, type the minimum and maximum values for the range. In the Interval Method section, choose one of the following: n
Interval—to define an interval between range values
Number—to define a number of range values In the Value box, type a value to indicate the interval or the number of range values. For example, if you choose a min imum value of 2 and a maximum value of 8, if you choose Interval and type 2 in the Value box, the ranges created will be 2-4, 4-6, and 6-8. If you choose Number and type 2 in the Value box, the ranges created will be 2-5 and 5-8. n
n
n
Click OK.
A maximum of 16 ranges will be created. The ranges will overwrite any existing ranges. You can remove or modify any of these rang es as described in Step 2 and Step 3.
5
When you have finished defining ranges, in the Editing Point Display Settings dialog box, click OK. If any ranges overlap (for example, 610-620 and 615-625), when a value falls into both ranges, only the symbol associated with the fir st set of values will be displayed.
NOTE: You can also define ranges by right-clicking Local or Shar ed under the Point Display Settings node and choosing New. Then, in the New Point Display Settings dialog box, choose Ranges and click O K. In this case, because you are not defin ing ranges based on an ex isting column, the Editing Point Display Settings dialog box is not automatically popu lated. You must define the values manually.
NOTE: If you define the values manua lly, you should define them to match the types and ranges of values that are likely to occur in your test mobile data.
155 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Test Mobile Data
To display the test mobile data points in a Map window After you define map view settings for a test mobile data file, you can display the data points in a Map wind ow. Any columns to which you have assigned point display settings are displayed as nodes in the Project Explorer under the test mobile data node.
1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Field Measurement Data node, then expa nd the Test Mobile node.
2
Expand the test mobile data node for which you want to view data points.
3
Right-click the column node that you want to view, and choose View. A new layer is added to the Map window.
NOTE: To remove the test mobile data poin ts from the Map window, in the Project Explorer, right-click the te st mobile data node (one level up from the column node) and choose View. This clears the check box and removes the data from the Map window.
To create a map view template for test mobile data You can create a map view template that you can apply to multiple test mobile data files. This is useful if you have similar data collected at another location. You can apply templates n
n
l
when you are importing a test mobile data file (see “To import test mobile data” ) when you are defining map view settings (see “To define map view settings for a test mobile data file” )
at any time by dragg ing the template onto a test mobile data file in the Project Explorer
Mentum Planet User Guide 156
Chapter 6
1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Field Measurement Data node, then expa nd the Test Mobile node.
2
Choose a test mobile data node and drag it onto the Map View Templates node. The Edit Template dialog box opens with the columns in the test mobile data file listed under the Data Columns heading.
3
For each column that you want to display, from the Point Display Setting list, choose a setting to apply to the column.
4
If you want to add a row, click Add and type a name for the test mobile data column in the Data Columns column.
5
If you want to remove a row, choose the row and click Remove .
6
Click OK.
7
In the Save Template dialog box, type a name in the New Template Name box and click OK. The template is added to the Map View Templates node under the Test Mobile node.
157 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Test Mobile Data
Viewing test mobile data in graph format You can view information about the records in your test mobile data file in graph format. This format enables y ou to view and compare the followin g types of information: n
parameters—the values for a specific param eter or parameters, such as quali ty, over a period of tim e or sequence of events
n
events—the values for events s uch as handovers or dropped calls, over a period of time or sequen ce of events
This information provides useful options for analyzing test mobile data. Viewing multiple parameters over time enables you to visualize the interaction between parameters. For example, in Figure 6.2, the RxLev is compared to the occurrences of the No Service Mode event (vertical lines).
Figure 6.2: Comparison of data in the Test Mobile Graph dialog box In the Test Mobile Grap h dialog box, the x- axis is either Time or Index. Index identifies the sequence of records in the test mobile file. You can display up to four values for the y-axis.
Mentum Planet User Guide 158
Chapter 6
The Test Mobile Graph dialog box provides two toolbars: n
n
The first toolbar enables you to format the graph. The second toolbar enables you to zoom, print, and navigate through the graph. For more information about how to use the second tool bar, press the F1 key.
When the Test Mobile Gr aph dialog box is open, if you also have a Test Mobile Browser window or Map window open, they are all synchron ized. If you choose a record in one, the same record is also chosen in the others.
To view test mobile data in graph f ormat 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Field Measurement Data node, then expa nd the Test Mobile node.
2
Right-click the test mobil e data node that you want to view and choose Graph. The Test Mobile Graph dialog box opens.
3
To modify the format of the x-axis, from the Settings list, choose X Axis and do any of the following: n
n
n
n
From the Data list, choose Time or Index. From the Color list, choose the color to use for the lines in the graph and the axis label. From the Font Size list, choose the font size for the axis label. If you want to view grid lines in the graph, enable the Grid Lines check box.
The display updates dynamically as you choose your options.
4
To define y-axis values, from the Settings list, choose one of the following options: n
First Y Series —defines the first column (numeric data only) to be displayed on the y-axis and the displ ay settings to be used. The
159 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Test Mobile Data
label for this series is located on the y-axis to the left of the graph. n
n
n
5
Second Y Series —defines the second column (numeric data only) to be displayed on the y-axis and the display settings to be used. The label for thi s series is located on the y-axis to the right of the graph. Third Y Series—defines the third column (numer ic data only) to be displayed on the y-axis and the display settings to be used. The label for th is series is located on th e y-axis to the left of the label for the First Y Series. Message Series —defines the fourth column (textual data only) to be displayed on the y-axis and the display settings to be used.
From the Data list, choose the type of data to display. If you choose Message Series in Step 4, the list available in the Data box is limited to the textual columns in the imported test mobile data file. Otherwise, the list is limited to nu merical values.
6
If you chose First Y Series , Second Y Series , or Third Y Series in Step 4, to format the data, do any of the follow ing: n
n
n
n
From the Color list, choose the color to use for the point or lines in the gra ph and the axis label. From the Font Size list, choose the font size for the axis label. Choose Points or Lines to use for the dat a in the grap h. If you chose Points, choose a point size from the Point Size list. If you want to view grid lines in the graph, enable the Grid Lines check box.
The display updates dynamically as you c hoose your option s. For numerical values, the Numerical legend box upd ates to display the legend for the data and color that you chose.
7
If you chose Message Series in Step 4, in the Message Legend box, enable the check boxes for the types of message that you want to view.
Mentum Planet User Guide 160
Chapter 6
8
If you want to compare multiple types of data, repeat Step 4 to Step 7 for the data that you want to view. You can compare up to three types of numeric data (using the First Y Series, Second Y Series, and Third Y Series option s) and one ty pe of string data.
NOTE: To close the Test Mobile Graph dialog box, right-click the test mobile data node and choose Graph again.
TIP: When you minimize the Test Mobile Graph dialog box, a Test Mobile Graph icon appears at t he bottom of the Pr oject Explorer. Click the icon to restore the dialog box.
To print the data in th e Test Mobile Graph window n
In the Test Mobile Graph dialog box, click the Print button.
TIP: You can also preview the printed version b y clicking the Print Preview button.
161 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Test Mobile Data
Allocating test mobile data to sectors If you want to convert your test mobile data to surveys or identify sectors by carrier or color code infor mation, you must allocat e the data to sectors. You can allocate data either automatically or manually. There are two steps in the automatic allocation process: n
n
looking up sectors allocating records to sectors
For details on the manu al allocation process, see “To assign sector s to test mobile carrier nodes manually” .
Looking up sectors for test mobile data During this part of the process, the Test Mobile tool attempts to match the information in the test mobile data file to sector information in Mentum Planet. This process differs slightl y depending on the technology: For WiMAX, the preamble code and, optionally, the carrier are u sed. During the automatic allocation process, the Test Mobile tool attempts to match the carrier and scrambling code combinations in the records in the test mobile data file to the carrier and scrambl ing code combinations in Mentum Planet. For more information on carriers and preamble codes, see the WiMAX User Guide . The values that are looked up are saved with the test mobile data file. This retains the attributes of the sectors that were used when the measurements were taken.
Allocating test mobile records to sectors During this part of the process, the Test Mobile tool ass igns the records in the test mobile data file to the sectors that match those records using one of the following methods: n
by distance—attemp ts to assign sectors to test mobile d ata records using the sector closest to the location where the record was captured
Mentum Planet User Guide 162
Chapter 6
n
by path loss—attemp ts to ass ign sectors to test mobile data r ecords using the sector with the least path loss to the location where the record was captured. The path loss is calculated using a fr ee space loss calculation that takes into consideration the effects of ERP, the antenna pattern, and the azimuth.
Records with a null RSSI value will not be assigned to a sector.
To look up sectors for test mobile data automatically 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Field Measurement Data node, then expa nd the Test Mobile node.
2
Right-click the test mobil e data node for which you want to look up sectors and choose Allocate Records. The Test Mobile - Allocate Records to Sectors dialog box opens. By default, the Serving Site/Sector Information tree view displays a list of carrier nodes that show the c ombinations of c arrier and color code, PN offset, or scrambling code that appear in the test mobile data file. Only nodes for which there are records with valid RSSI valu es are displayed. For these nodes, the number of records valid RS SIe, values is s hown in parentheses. a record is missing a carrwith ier or color cod PN offset, or scrambling code, If it is identified as missing. For example, if the test mobile data uses GSM technology and the carrier node is labeled 69-67 (317), this means that there are 317 r ecords in the test mobile data file with a BCCH of 69 and a BSIC of 67. If the node is labeled Missing-Missing (108), this means that there are 108 records that do not contain a BCCH or BSIC.
3
In the Sectors section, click Look Up, an d then in the Sector Selection dialog box, choose the group of sectors to use and click Continue. The Serving Site/Sector Information tree view is updated to show which carrier nodes match values from the Mentum Planet sectors. Carrier nodes that do match Mentum Planet sectors are shown in red. You can manually assign sectors to unma tched carrier nodes. See “To assign sectors to test mobile carrier nodes manually” .
163 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Test Mobile Data
4
If you want to look up additional sectors fr om a different group, repeat Step 3, and then in the confirmation dialog box, do one of the following: n
Click Ye s to remove existing sector assignm ents. Any sectors that have already been allocated to the test mobile records will be removed.
n
5
Click No to keep existing sector assignments.
If required, manually adjust any sector assignments. See “To assign sectors to test mobile carrier nodes manually” .
You can also look up sectors by doing one of the following: n
n
To look up sectors for all carrier nodes, right-click the toplevel node and choose Look Up Sectors. To look up sectors for a sin gle carrier node, right-click the carrier node and choose Look Up Sectors.
Mentum Planet User Guide 164
Chapter 6
To assign sectors to test mobile carrier nodes manually If you wan t to assign a sector to a carrier node, and the sector has either no t been assigned automatically or has been assigned in correctly, you can assign a sect or manually. You can assign multip le sec tors to eac h carrier node.
1
In the Test Mobile - Allocate Records To Sectors dialog box, in the Serving Site/Sector Information tree view, choose a carrier node and click Assign Sector .
2
In the Sector Selectio n dialog box, choose the group that contains the sector tha t you want to assign, and click Continue.
3
In the Site Lookup dialog box, choose the sector to assign to the carrier node and click OK.
You can also assign a sector by right-clicking a carrier node in the Serving Site/Sector Infor mation tree v iew and c hoosing Assign Sector.
To add a virtual test mobile sector A virtual sector is one that does not exist in your Mentum Planet project, but that was part of the drive test. This sec tor could be part of anoth er region, a competitor’s sector, or no long er on the air. You can add a virtual sector to the Serving Site/Sector Information tree view and allocate the appropriate records to it. Virtual sectors appear only as part of the Test Mobile tool. They are not added to your Mentum Planet project.
1
In the Test Mobile - Allocate Records To Sectors dialog box, in the Serving Site/Sector Information tree view, right-click the carrier node to which you want to assign th e virtual sector, and click Add Virtual Sector.
2
In the Add Virtual Sector dialog box, in the Site Name box, type a name for the site to which the virtu al sector belongs, and in the Sector Name box, type a name for the virtual sector.
3
In the Antenna Information section, do the following:
165 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Test Mobile Data
n
n
n
n
From the Name list, choose the name of the antenna. In the X/Long box, type the x-coordinate of th e sector. This value must be within the co-ordinates of the heights file for the project. In the Y/Lat box, type the y-coordinate of th e sector. This value must be within the co-ordinates of the heights file for the project. In the Height box, type the height of the sector above ground level.
n
In the Power box, type the power of the sector.
n
In the Azimuth box, type the azimuth of the sector.
n
In the Tilt box, type the tilt of the sector.
For more information on any of these values, press the F1 key.
4
Click OK.
To view or modify sector information You can view information about any of the serving sectors in the Serving Site/Sector tree view. The information that is displayed ori ginally is the information associated with that sector in Mentum Planet. When you modify information in the Sector Information section of the Test Mobile - Allocate Records to Sectors dialog box, you are modifying only the data associated with the test mobile data file. You are not changing the values assigned to the sectors in M entum Planet. Typically, you would modify this data when you know that a sector that actually exists (and was used to collect the test mobile data) has different values than those assigned in Mentum Planet.
1
In the Test Mobile - Allocate Records To Sectors dialog box, in the Serving Site/Sector Information tree view, choose th e sector. The Sector Information displays the information for the chosen s ector.
2
If you want to modify the sector information, type new values in any of the edita ble boxe s, and click Apply.
Mentum Planet User Guide 166
Chapter 6
To allocate test mobile records to sectors 1
In the Records section, choose the By Distance or By Path Loss option for assigning records where there is more than one possible match. See “Allocating test mobile data to sectors” for more information on these options.
2
Do one of the following: n
n
To allocate records to all sector s, in the Serving Site/Sector Information tree view, choose the top-le vel node and in the Records section , click Allocate. The Serving Site/Sector Information tree view is updated to show the number of records that have been assigned to all sectors in parentheses following the sector names. To allocate record s to a single sector only, in th e Serving Site/Sector Information tree view , choose a sector an d in the Records section , click Allocate. The Serving Site/Sector Information tree view is updated to show the number of records that have been assigned to the chosen sector in parentheses following the sector name.
If you click All ocate, but you have not yet looked u p sectors, the Test Mob ile tool automatically looks up sectors before allocating records. NOTE: If you want to hide sectors that have not been al located, in the Serving Site/Sector Information tree view, right-click the top-level node, and choose Hide All Unmatched Sectors. You can view all sectors by right-clicking th e top-level node again and choosing Show All Sectors.
NOTE: You can also allocate records by right-clicking a carrier n ode in the Site/Sector Infor mation tree v iew and c hoosing Allocate Records by Minimum Distance or Allocate Records by Minimum Path Loss. This option is only available if you have looked up sectors automatically or assigned sectors manually first.
167 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Test Mobile Data
To view the test mobile records You can view the test mobile data records associated with a sector or a carrier node. n
In the Test Mobile - Allocate Records to Sectors dialog box, in the Serving Site/Sector Information tree view, right-click the item and choose Browse Records.
A Test Mobile Brow ser window opens, showing the records associated with the item that you chose.
To unassign sectors n
In the Serving Site/Sector Information tree view, choose the sector , and in the Sectors section , click Unassign Sector.
You can also unassign a sector by right-clicking the sector and choosing Unassign Sector.
To modify the display in the Test Mobile tree view By default, when you assign sectors to carrier nodes, the sectors are added to the Serving Site/Sector Inf ormation tree view under each c arrier node. You can reverse the order to display the carrier nodes under the sectors. n
In the Test Mobile - Allocate Records to Sectors dialog box, in the Serving Site/Sector Information section, rightclick the top-level nod e, and choose Toggle View.
TIP: You can restore the srcin al view by right-clicking the top-level node and choosing Toggle View again.
Mentum Planet User Guide 168
Chapter 6
Exporting test mobile data to surveys After you have allocated test mobile data to sectors, you can export th e test mobile data to one or more surveys. For information on allocating test mobile data to secto rs, see “Allocating test mobile data to sectors” . When you export the test mobile data to a survey, the latitu de, longitude, signal streng th, and sector hea der information are exported. You can choose one of the following options for export: n
n
With Assignment—creates an assignment fi le with the survey assigned to the matched sector (see “To export a survey assignment file” for details on assignment files). Without Assignment—does not create an assignment file
For more information on what you can do with the exported sur veys, see “ Chapter 3: Managing Survey Data”. The Export to Survey function for test mobile data files is subject to the sampling rates of the srcinal test mobile data files. The equipment used to create the srcinal test mobile data files is not alwa ys configured to sample data with enough samples for quality model tuning purposes (for example, to satisfy the Lee Criteria).
To export test mobile data to surv eys 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Field Measurement Data node, then expa nd the Test Mobile node.
2
Right-click the test mobil e data node you want to view and choose one of the following: n
Export To Surve y
Wit h Assignment
n
Export To Surve y
Wit hout Assi gnment
The test mobile data is conver ted to one or more surveys. The exported surveys are grouped under the Surveys RSSI node. The name of the group is the same as t he test mobile data name. Surveys with invalid head er information are identi by a red in the Project Explorer. A warning message identifies thefied surveys withicon invalid headers.
169 Mentum Planet User Guide
Chapter 7 Managing Scan Receiver Data Scan receiver data consists of data relating to the location and signal strength of multiple carriers. A scan receiver c ollects only inform ation related to signal strength and is never involved in an actual call. The scan receiver data features of Mentum Planet are part of the AMDP module. This chapter covers the following topics:
Unde rstanding scan re ceive r data
171
Workflow for scanrece ive r data
173
Importingscanre ce ive rdata
174
Viewing info rmation about a scan re ceiver data file Vie wingscanre ce ive rdata
180
Displaying scan receiver data in a Map w indow Viewing scan receiver data in graph for mat Allocating scan re ce iver data to se ctors Exporting scan re ce ive r data to surveys
179
183 192 196 203
Mentum Planet User Guide 170
Chapter 7
Understanding scan receiver data Scan receiver equipment enables network operators to collect reporting and measurement data. Typically, scan receiver equip ment takes measurem ents along a defined route over a period of time. The use of sc an receiver equip ment in operational cellular networks is a common network optimization practice. Scan receiver data consists of records organized into colum ns. Mentum Planet enables you to work with and analyze scan receiver data to increase the accuracy of predictions. For example, you can compare a scan receiver value against networ k analysis layers that contain th e same value, or you can export scan receiver data to a survey and use the survey to increase the accuracy of Mentum Planet predictions. For information on merged prediction s that c ombine s urvey data with prediction outputs, see “Choosing a prediction mode” .
Input file requirements for scan receive r data Scan receiver data that you want to import into Mentum Planet must: n
n
n
n
n
use a technology that is supported by Mentum Planet and is enabled in your project overlap the heights file for the project be in text (.txt or .csv) for mat contain data from only one scan receiver (if you have combined d ata from multiple scan receivers, the scan receiver tool will not distinguish between the measurements taken by each one, and will treat the data as though it came from a single scan receiver) contain the followin g information in each record:
n
latitude or northing
n
longitude or easting
n
signal strength (RSSI or equivalent), if you want to export the data to a survey
Scan receiver data file header
171 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Scan Receiver Data
Because networks are not static, a scan receiver recordin g is only valid for the network c onfiguration when it was recorded. If any attributes of the network, for example, antennas or power s, are changed, the data ma y be less accura te or invalid. To ensure that the scan receiver da ta is valid, a snapsh ot is taken of the network configuration at the time the data was collected, and this information (referred to as header information) is recorded along with the scan receiver data file. See “To view information about a scan receiver data file” .
Mentum Planet User Guide 172
Chapter 7
Workflow for scan receiver data Step 1
Import scan receiver data. See “Importing scan receiver data” .
Step 2
View the data in a Map window, table, or graph. See
Step 3
n
“Viewing scan receiver data”
n
“Viewing scan receiver data in graph for mat”
If you want to export the signal strength values (RSSI or equivalent), do the following: n
n
Allocate the data to Mentum Planet sectors. See “Allocating scan receiver data to sectors” . Export the data to a survey. See “Exporting scan receiver data to surveys” .
173 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Scan Receiver Data
Importing scan receiver data The Scan Receiver Data Import Wizard guides you through the process of importing your scan receiver data. As you proceed through the wizard, you must provide the followin g information: n
n
the network technol ogy used in the scan receiver data file the file type (delimited text file or comm a-separated value file)
n
the file or files to import
n
the delimiter between columns in the scan receiver data file, if applicable
n
the date the scan r eceiver data file was created
n
the coordinate system of the scan receiver data file
You must also bind the columns in the imported data to fields in Mentum Planet. At a minimum, you must bind latitude and longitude, but you can bind additional columns depending on the technology. Once y ou have bound the columns, you can save the bindi ng information as a template to use again. This is useful for files from the same equipment that have been exported in the same manner.
To import scan receiver data NOTE: This procedure may vary slightly depen ding on the type of data that you are importing.
When binding data using the Scan Receiver Wizard , you must choose a value from the list or click the down arrow a second time to close the list.
1 2
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Field Measurement Data node. Right-click Scan Receiver and choose Import.
Mentum Planet User Guide 174
Chapter 7
The Scan Receiver Data Import Wizard opens.
3
On the Welcome page, click Next.
4
On the Choose A Technology page, choose the techno logy of the scan receiver data file and click Next.
5
On the Choose The Type Of The Source Data File page, choose th e file type of the scan receiver data file and click Next.
6
On the Choose The Data File(s) You Want To Use page, click Browse, navigate to the scan receiver data file or files, click Open, and then click Next.
7
On the Choose The Format Of The Source Data File page, do the following: n
n
n
n
n
n
n
In the Delimiters section, enable one or mor e of the check boxes (Tab, Semicolon, Comma, Space, Other) to identify the delimiters used to separate values in the scan receiver data file. If you enabled the Other check box, type a delimiter in the adjacent box. If the scan receiver data file contain s a header row, en able the Us e Header Row check box and, from the Header Row list, choose the row number of the header row. From the Start Import At Row list, choose the row number at which to start the import. This option is useful if your test mobil e data file has comments at the beginning or multiple header rows that do not need to be imported. In the Rows With Invalid Latitude/Longitude section, choose one of the following options to define how to manage invalid coordinates: Discard Row s With Invalid Coord inates —do not import records with invalid latitude and longitude values. Use Value Fro m Last Valid R ecord —copy valid latitude and longitude values from the previous record . The coordinate values 0,0 are used if it is the first record.
The lower part of the page updates to show the results of your choices.
8
Click Next.
175 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Scan Receiver Data
The Choose How You Want the Data Bound Page opens.
9
For each column that you want to bind, do the following: n
n
Click in the Mentum Pla net Field box and, from the list, choose the Mentum Planet field to which you want to bind the scan receiver data column. Click in the Data Form at row and choose the format for the data. Typically, you will only need to choose a format for latitude, longitude, and BSIC. All other columns offer only one option that is automatically chosen. At a minimum, you must bind colum ns to the latitude and longitude fields in Mentu m Planet. Any columns that you do not bind are shown as . At a minimum, you must bind colum ns to the latitude and longitude fields in Mentu m Planet. A green indicator is displayed if the binding is successful and a red indicator if the binding is unsuccessful. Any columns that y ou do not bind are shown as . You can move the cursor over the indicator for more information. The Binding Status section displays the available Mentum
Mentum Planet User Guide 176
Chapter 7
Planet c olumns. When the bin ding is successf ul, a check mark is displayed. When the binding is unsuccessful, an X is displayed.
10 If you want to use a template to bind th e scan receiver data to Mentu m Planet fields, click Load Template , navigate to the template file that you want to use, and click Open. By default, templates are stored in the Scan Receiver Data/Templ ate Files folder. Once you load the template, you can modify any of the rows for a single use, save them as a new template, or overwrite the current temp late.
11 If you want to bind mu ltiple columns to a single Mentum Planet field (for example, if you have multiple PN offset columns), do the following: n
n
n
12
13 14
Choose the column s by holding down the Shift or Ctrl key and clicking the column headers. Click Multiple Bindings. In the Bind Multiple Columns dialog box, from the Mentum Planet Field list, choose the Mentum Planet field to which to bind the columns, from the Data Format list, choose the format for the data, and click OK.
If you want to save the bin ding information to use with other scan receiver data files, click Save As Template , navigate to the folder where you want to save the template, type a name for the bin ding template file in the Name box, and click Save. In the Scan Receiver Data Import Wizard , click Next. If you want to modify the file header information, on the Enter Header Information page, do any of the following: n
n
n
In the Data Name box, type a new name. The default data name is the file name minus the extension. This is the name that will be displayed in the Project Explorer . In the Operator Name box, type the name of the network operator. Click the down arr ow in the Data Date box and choose a different date to apply to the scan receiver data file.
177 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Scan Receiver Data
n
n
15
Beside the Coordinate System box, click Change, and in the Choose Projection dialog box, choose the new projection category and mem ber, and then click OK. In the Comments box, type any additional comments or modify the existing comments.
Click Next. The Data Import dialog box displays the progress of the import process.
16
On the Choose A Map View Template page, do one of the following: n
n
n
If you do not want to apply a map view template, choose from the Map View Template list. To use an existing map view templ ate to display data points in the Map window, choose a template from the Map View Template list. To create a new tem plate, click New Template and follow Step 3 to Step 7 in the pr ocedure, “To create a map view template for scan receiver data”.
For details on map view templa tes, see “ Displaying scan receiver data in a Map window”.
17
Click Next and then click Finish. The scan receiver data file is added as a node to the Scan Receiver node under the Field Measurement Data node in the Operational Data category of the Project Explorer.
Mentum Planet User Guide 178
Chapter 7
Viewing information about a scan receiver data file At any time, you can view inform ation about a scan receiver data file, includ ing the following: n
data name
n
data date
n
network technology
n
operator name
n
coordinate system
n
any comments that you have entered ab out the scan receiver data file
To view information about a scan receiver data file 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Field Measurement Data node, then expa nd the Scan Receiver node.
2
Right-click a scan receiver data node and choose Properties. The Scan Receiver - Data Properties dialog box opens.
3
If you want to modify the information, do any of the following and click OK: n
n
n
Click the down arrow in the Data Date box and choose a different date to apply to the scan receiver data file. In the Operator Name box, type the name of the network operator. In the Comments box, type any additional comments or modify the existing c omments.
179 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Scan Receiver Data
Viewing scan receiver data After you import a scan receiver data file, you can quickly view n
n
the data points (i.e., th e location where each record was captured) in the Map window the scan receive r data records in tabular format
You can also display the values in individual columns in the Map window, but you must first define the settings to use for these values.
To view the scan receiver data locations in a Map window 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Field Measurement Data node, then expa nd the Scan Receiver node.
2
Right-click a scan receiver data node and choose View. A new layer is added to the Map window displaying each location using a default symbol and c olor.
NOTE: To remove the scan receiver d ata from the Map window, right-click the scan receiver data node and choose View again.
Mentum Planet User Guide 180
Chapter 7
To find scan receiver data in a Map window You can use the Locate function to view and zoom in on the scan receiver data in the Map window.
1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Field Measurement Data node, then expa nd the Scan Receiver node.
2
Right-click a scan receiver data node and choose Locate . The scan receiver data is centered in the Map window and the Map window zooms in on it.
To view scan receiver data in tabular format 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Field Measurement Data node, then expa nd the Scan Receiver node.
2
Right-click a scan receiver data node and choose Browse. The Scan Receiver Browser window opens containing the scan receiver data in tabular format. Any columns that you have bound are identified by a Mentum Planet icon. You can move your cursor over the Mentum Planet icon to view the name of the Mentum Planet field to which the column has been bound.
181 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Scan Receiver Data
3
To sort the data, in ascending or descending order, click the header of the column that you wan t to use for sorting. To reverse the order, click the column header ag ain.
4
To filter the data, click the down arrow in the column header that you want to use for filtering and choose the value to display. The name of the filter (the column name plus the value that you chose to display) is shown at the bottom of the dialog box, for example ([Message Type] = ‘Cell Report’).
5
If you filtered the data, in the filter section at the bottom if the dialog box, do any of the following: n
n
To remove the filter temporarily, clear the check box associated with it. To remove the filter completely, click the close button located to the left of the filter name.
Mentum Planet User Guide 182
Chapter 7
Displaying scan receiver data in a Map window You can graphically display the data associated with the points in the drive test by defining map view settings for the scan receiver data file. Map view settings identify which columns to display and which point display settings to apply to each column.
Understanding point display settings Point display settings define how to pr esent the data in a column. They enable you to define the symbol, size, and color for each value or rang e of values in a column. There are three types of point display settings: n
n
Individual—enables you to assign a single symbol and color for a specific value. Use this option for colum ns that contain textual data or that have a limited number of fixed values. For example, if your scan receiver data file has a column called Direction with values of Uplink and Downlink, you can as sign a different symbol and color for Uplink and Downlink. Ranges—enable you to assign a symbol size to a range of values. Use this option for columns with a high number of individual values. For example, if your scan receiver data file has a column for RxLev (the received power l evel), you can assign symbo ls to ranges of RxLev values (e.g., 0-5.6, 5.6-11.2, 11.2-16.6, etc.).
Automatic selection When you define map view settings for a scan receiver data file, if you choose to create new point display settings, the Scan Receiver tool au tomatically chooses an appropriate point display setting type, and, by default, assigns the column nam e and display values based on the content of the colum n. You can modify these values.
Understanding how display information is organized Scan receiver display information is located in three sections under the Field Measurement Data node in the Operational Data category of the Project Explorer: n
Point display se ttings are stored und er the Point Display Setting s node. They are classified as either Local (i.e. , not stored in Data Manager), or Shared (i.e., stored in Data Manager).
183 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Scan Receiver Data
n
n
Map view templates, which are groups of point display settings and associated column n ames, are stored under the Map View Templates node under the Scan Receiver node. If you have defined map view settings for a scan receiver data file, the names of any columns that have a point display setting assigned to them are displayed under the scan receiver data node along with the name of the point display setting, in the format - . For example, in Figure 7.1, the All-ARFCN TCH column in the TMData scan receiver data file is assigned the Channels point display setting.
Figure 7.1 shows the organization of point display and map view settings in the Project Explorer.
Figure 7.1: Point display and m ap view settings in the Project Explorer
To define map view settings f or a scan receiver data file 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Field Measurement Data node, then expa nd the Scan Receiver node.
2
Right-click a scan receiver data node and choose Map View Settings.
Mentum Planet User Guide 184
Chapter 7
The Map View Setting s dialog box opens. The Map View Setting s dialog box enables you to define point display settings for the columns in your scan receiver data file. If you applied a template when you imported the scan receiver data file or if you have already defined map view settings for the scan receiver data file, the Map View Settings dialog box contains the defined values. Otherwise, it conta ins no val ues.
3
If you want to apply a map view template to the scan receiver data, click Load, and in the Load Template dialog box, choose a template from the list and click OK. For information on creating a map view template, see “To create a map view template for scan receiver data” .
4
To add a data column from the scan receiver data file, click Add. The Column Assignment dialog box opens.
5
From the Data Col umns list, choose one or more columns in the scan receiver data file that you want to display.
6
Do one of the following: n
n
From the Point Display Setting list, choose an existing point display setting to ap ply to the scan receiver colum n, click OK, and go to Step 10. From the Point Display Setting list, choose Create New Setting , click OK, and go to Step 7. The Scan Receiver tool automatically chooses the correct display setting type or types (individual or
185 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Scan Receiver Data
ranges) based on the contents of the data column that you chose, and provides a default nam e for the setting.
7
In the New Point Display Settings dialog box, choose a display setting type, type a name or accept the defa ult, and click OK. If the data in the column is textual, only the Individual display se tting type will be availab le. If the data is numeric, all three types will b e available.
8
Click OK.
9
Do one of the following: n
n
10
If you chose to defin e individual point display settings, see “To define individual point display settings” . If you chose to d efine ranges, see “To define point display settings for ranges of values” .
If you want to view the data in the Map window, in the Map View Settings dialog box, choose the point display setting that you want to view and click View. A new layer is added to th e Map window.
11
If you w ant to sa ve the map view settin gs as a template, click Save As , and in the Save Template dialog box, type a name for the template, and click OK.
12
When you have finished defining map view settings, in the Map View Settings dialog box, click OK. The names of the columns with point display settings assigned are displayed in the Project Explorer under the scan receiver data file (see Figure 7.1). To view them, see “To display the scan receiver data points in a Map window” . The point display settings are also added to the Shared node under the Point Display Se ttings node. These settings can be used again for other scan r eceiver or scan receiver data files.
Mentum Planet User Guide 186
Chapter 7
NOTE: You can move point display settings between the Local and Shar ed node by choosing one or more point display settings in the Project Explorer and dragging them to the Local or Shared node.
NOTE: To edit point display settings, under the Local or Shared node, right-click the point display setting and choose Edit.
NOTE: You can also apply a map view temp late by dragging it onto a scan receiver data file in the Project Explorer.
To define individual point display settings When you are defining map view settings for a scan receiver data file, the Editing Point Display Settings dialog box is automatically populated with values from the column that you chose.
1
To add a row, in the Editing Point Display Settings dialog box, click Add.
2
To remove a row, choose the row and click Remove . You cannot remove the Default value. This value is used to define displ ay settings for any value that you do not specifically enter.
3
To modify a row, do any of the following: n
n
n
n
Click in the Name box and type a new column name. If you do not want the valu e to be visible in the Map window, clear the Visible check box. Clearing the Visible check box is useful if you do not want to view points that match this value now, but may want to view them later. To change the symb ol, click in th e Symbol box, and from the list, choose the font, and then choose the individu al symbol, and click OK. Click in the Size box and type or choose the symbol size that you want.
187 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Scan Receiver Data
n
4
To modify the color , click in t he Color box and choose the color that you want.
When you have finished defining individual point display settings, in the Editing Point Display Settings dialog box, click OK.
You can also define individual point display settings by right-clicking Local or Shared under the Point Display Setting s node and c hoosing New. Then, in the New Point Display Settings dialog box, choose Individual and click OK. In this case, because you are not defining in dividual point display settings based on an existing column , the Editing Point Display Settings dialog box is not automatically populated. You must define the values manually. If you define the v alues manually, you should define them to match the types and ranges of values that are likely to occur in your test mobile data.
To define point display settings for ranges of value s When you are defining map view settings for a scan receiver data file, the Editing Point Display Settings dialog box is automatically populated with values from the column that you chose.
1
In the Editing Point Display Settings dialog box, if you want to
2
To remove a row, choose the row and click Remove .
3
To modify a row, do any of the following:
add a row, click Add.
n
n
n
n
In the >=Min box, type or choose the minimum value for the range. In the < Max box, type or choose the maximum value for the range. To change the sym bol, click in th e Symbol box, and from the list, choose the font, and then choose the individual symbol, and click OK. Click in the Size box and type or choose the symbol size.
Mentum Planet User Guide 188
Chapter 7
n
4
To modify the color , click in t he Color box and choose a color.
To define ranges automatically, click Auto, and in the Auto Range Settings dialog box, do the following: n
n
n
n
n
In the Minimum and Maximum boxes, type the minimum and maximum values for the range. In the Minimum and Maximum boxes, type the minimum and maximum values for the range. In the Interval Method section, choose one of the following: n
Interval—to define an interval between range values
n
Number—to define a number of range values
In the Value box, type a value to indicate the interval or the number of range values. For example, if you choose a min imum value of 2 and a maximum value of 8, if you choose Interval and type 2 in the Value box, the ranges created will be 2-4, 4-6, and 6-8. If you choose Number and type 2 in the Value box, the ranges created will be 2-5 and 5-8. Click OK.
A maximum of 16 ranges will be created. The ranges will overwrite any existing ranges. You can remove or modify any of these rang es as described in Step 2 and Step 3.
5
When you have finished defining ranges, in the Editing Point Display Settings dialog box, click OK. If any ranges overlap (for example, 610-620 and 615-625), when a value falls into both ranges, only the symbol associated with the fir st set of values will be displayed.
TIP: You can also define ranges by right-clicking Local or Shared un der the Point Display Settings node and choosing New. Then, in the New Point Display Settings dialog box, choose Ranges and click O K. In this case, because you are not defin ing ranges based on an ex isting column, the Editing Point Display Settings dialog box is not automatically popu lated. You must define the values manually.
189 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Scan Receiver Data
TIP: If you define the values manual ly, you should define them to match th e types and ranges of values that are likely to occur in your test mobile data.
To display the sc an receiver data points in a Map window After you define map view settings for a scan receiver data file, you can display the data points in a Map wind ow. Any columns to which you have assigned point display settings are displayed as nodes in the Project Explorer under the scan receiver data node.
1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Field Measurement Data node, then expa nd the Scan Receiver node.
2
Expand the scan receiver data node for which you want to view data points.
3
Right-click the column node that you want to view, and choose View. A new layer is added to the Map window.
To removeright-click the sc an the receiver points from th e Mapleve window, in the Project Explorer, s candata receiver data node (one l up from the column node) and choose View. This clears the check box and removes the data from the Map window.
To create a map view template for scan receiver data You can create a map view template that you can apply to multiple scan receiver data files. This is useful if you have similar data collected at another location. You can apply templates n
n
n
when you are importing a scan receiver data file (see “To import scan receiver data” ) when you are defining map view settings (see “To define map view settings for a scan receiver data file” ) at any time by dragg ing the template o nto a scan receiver data file in the Project E xplorer
Mentum Planet User Guide 190
Chapter 7
1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Field Measurement Data node, then expa nd the Scan Receiver node.
2
Choose a scan receiver data node and drag it onto the Map View Templates node. The Edit Template dialog box opens with the columns in the scan receiver data file listed under the Data Columns heading.
3
For each column that you want to display, from the Point Display Setting list, choose a setting to apply to the column.
4
If you want to add a row, click Add and type a name for the scan receiver data column in the Data Columns column.
5
If you want to remove a row, choose the row and click Remove .
6
Click OK.
7
In the Save Template dialog box, type a name in the New Template Name box and click OK. The template is added to the Map View Templates node under the Scan Receiver node.
191 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Scan Receiver Data
Viewing scan receiver data in graph format You can view information about the records in your scan receiver data file in graph format. This format enables y ou to view and compare the followin g types of information: n
parameters—the values for a specific param eter or parameters, such as quali ty, over a period of tim e or sequence of events
n
events—the values for events s uch as handovers or dropped calls, over a period of time or sequen ce of events
This information provides useful options for analyzing sc an receiver data. Viewing multiple parameters over time enables you to visualize the interaction between parameters. For example, Figure 7.2 the RxLev is compared to the occurrences of the No Service Mode event (vertical lines).
Figure 7.2: Comparison of data in the Scan Receiver Gr aph dialog box In the Scan Receiver Graph dialog box, the x-axis is either Time or Index. Index identifies the sequence of records in the scan receiver file. You can display up to four values for the y-axis. The Scan Receiver Graph dialog box provides two toolbars:
Mentum Planet User Guide 192
Chapter 7
n
n
The first toolbar enables you to format the graph. The second toolbar enables you to zoom, print, and navigate through the graph. For more information about how to use the second tool bar, press the F1 key.
When the Scan Receiver Gr aph dialog box is open, if you also have a Scan Receiver Browser window or Map window open, they are all synchron ized. If you choose a record in one, the same record is also chosen in the others.
To view scan receiver data in graph format 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Field Measurement Data node, then expa nd the Scan Receiver node.
2
Right-click the scan receiver data node that you want to view, and choose Graph. The Scan Receiver Graph dialog box opens.
3
To modify the format of the x-axis, from the Settings list, choose X Axis and do any of the following: n
From the Data list, choose one of the following:
n
Time—displays the time on the x-axis
n
Index—displays sequence nu mbers on the x-axis
n
n
From the Font Size list, choose the font size for the axis label. If you want to view grid lines in the graph, enable the Grid Lines check box.
The display updates dynamically as you choose your options.
4
To define y-axis values, from the Settings list, choose one of the following options: n
First Y Series —defines the first column (numeric data only) to be displayed on the y-axis and the displ ay settings to be used. The label for this series is located on the y-axis to the left of the graph.
193 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Scan Receiver Data
n
n
n
5
Second Y Series —defines the second column (numeric data only) to be displayed on the y-axis and the display settings to be used. The label for thi s series is located on the y-axis to the right of the graph. Third Y Series—defines the third column (numer ic data only) to be displayed on the y-axis and the display settings to be used. The label for th is series is located on th e y-axis to the left of the label for the First Y Series. Message Series —defines the fourth column (textual data only) to be displayed on the y-axis and the display settings to be used.
From the Data list, choose the type of data to display. If you choose Message Series in Step 4, the list available in the Data box is limited to the textual columns in the imported scan receiver data file. Otherwise, the list is limited to nu merical values.
6
If you chose First Y Series , Second Y Series , or Third Y Series in Step 4, to format the data, do any of the follow ing: n
n
n
n
From the Color list, choose the color to use for the point or lines in the gra ph and the axis label. From the Font Size list, choose the font size for the axis label. Choose Points or Lines to use for the dat a in the grap h. If you chose Points, choose a point size from the Point Size list. If you want to view grid lines in the graph, enable the Grid Lines check box.
The display updates dynamically as you c hoose your option s. For numerical values, the Numerical legend box upd ates to display the legend for the data and color that you chose.
7
If you chose Message Series in Step 4, in the Message Legend box, enable the check boxes for the types of message that you want to view.
8
If you want to compare multiple types of data, repeat Step 4 to Step 7 for the data that you want to view.
Mentum Planet User Guide 194
Chapter 7
You can compare up to three types of numeric data (using the First Y Series, Second Y Series, and Third Y Series option s) and one ty pe of string data. To close the Scan Receiver Graph dialog box, right-click the scan receiver data node and choose Graph again. When you minimize the Scan Receiver Graph dialog box, a Scan Receiver Graph icon appears at the bottom of the Project Explorer . Click the icon to restore the dialog box.
To print the data in the Scan Receive r Graph window n
In the Scan Receiver Graph dialog box, click the Print button.
You can also preview the printed version by clicking the Print Preview button.
195 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Scan Receiver Data
Allocating scan receiver data to sectors If you want to convert your scan receiver data to surveys or identify sectors by carrier or color code infor mation, you must allocat e the data to sectors. You can allocate data either automatically or manually. There are two steps in the automatic allocation process: n
n
looking up sectors allocating records to sectors
For details on the manu al allocation process, see “To assign sector s to scan receiver c arrier nodes manually” .
Looking up sectors for scan receiver data During this part of the process, the Scan Receiver tool attempts to match the information in the scan receiver data file to sector information in Mentum Planet. This process differ s slightly depending on the technology.
Allocating scan receiver records to sectors During this part of the process, the Scan Receiver tool assigns the records in the scan receiver data file to the sectors that match those records using one of the following methods: n
n
by distance—attemp ts to assign sectors to scan receiver data records using the sector closest to the location where the record was captured by path loss—attempts to assign sectors to scan receiver d ata records using the sector with the least path loss to the location where the record was captured . The path loss is calculated using a free space loss calculation that takes into consideration the effects of ERP, the antenna patter n, and the azimuth.
Records with a null RSSI value will not be assigned to a sector.
Mentum Planet User Guide 196
Chapter 7
To look up sectors for scan receiver data automatically 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Field Measurement Data node, then expa nd the Scan Receiver node.
2
Right-click the scan receiver d ata node for which you want to look up sectors and choose Allocate Records. The Scan Receiver - Allocate Records to Sectors dialog box opens. By default, the Serving Site/Sector Information tree view displays a list of carrier nodes that show the c ombinations of c arrier and color code, PN offset, or scrambling code that appear in the scan receiver data file. Only nodes for which there are records with valid RSSI valu es are displayed. For these nodes, the number of records with valid RS SI values is s hown in parentheses. If a record is missing a carr ier or color cod e, PN offset, or scrambling code, it is identified as missing. For example, if the scan receiver da ta uses GSM technology and the carrier node is labeled 69 -67 (317), this means that there are 317 r ecords in the scan receiver data file with a BCCH of 69 and a BSIC of 67. If the node is labeled Missing-Missing (108), this means that there are 108 records that do not contain a BCCH or BSIC.
3
In the Sectors section, click Look Up, an d then in the Sector Selection dialog box, choose the group of sectors to use and click Continue. The Serving Site/Sector Information tree view is updated to show which carrier nodes match values from the Mentum Planet sectors. Carrier nodes that do match Mentum Planet sectors are shown in red. You can manually assign sectors to unma tched carrier nodes. See “To assign sectors to scan receiver c arrier nodes manually” .
197 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Scan Receiver Data
4
If you want to look up additional sectors fr om a different group, repeat Step 3, and then in the confirmation dialog box, do one of the following: n
Click Ye s to remove existing sector assignm ents. Any sectors that have already been allocated to the scan receiver records will be removed.
n
5
Click No to keep existing sector assignments.
If required, manually adjust any sector assignments. See “To assign sectors to scan receiver carrier nodes manually” .
You can also look up sectors by doing one of the following: n
n
To look up sectors for al l carrier n odes, right-click the toplevel node (the file name) and c hoose Look Up Sectors. To look up sectors for a sin gle carrier node, right-click the carrier node and choose Look Up Sectors.
Mentum Planet User Guide 198
Chapter 7
To assign sectors to scan receiver carrier nodes manually If you wan t to assign a sector to a carrier node, and the sector has either no t been assigned automatically or has been assigned in correctly, you can assign a sect or manually. You can assign multip le sec tors to eac h carrier node.
1
In the Scan Receiver - Allocate Records To Sectors dialog box, in the Serving Site/Sector Information tree view, choose a carrier node and click Assign Sector .
2
In the Sector Selectio n dialog box, choose the group that contains the sector tha t you want to assign, and click Continue.
3
In the Site Lookup dialog box, choose the sector to assign to the carrier node and click OK.
You can also assign a sector by right-clicking a carrier node in the Serving Site/Sector Infor mation tree v iew and c hoosing Assign Sector.
To add a virtual scan receiver sector A virtual sector is one that does not exist in your Mentum Planet project, but that was part of the drive test. This sec tor could be part of anoth er region, a competitor’s sector, or no long er on the air. You can add a virtual sector to the Serving Site/Sector Information tree view and allocate the appropriate records to it. Virtual sectors appear only as part of the Scan Receiver tool. They are not added to your Mentum Planet project.
1
In the Scan Receiver - Allocate Records To Sectors dialog box, in the Serving Site/Sector Inf ormation tree view, right-click the carrier node to which you want to assign th e virtual sector, and click Add Virtual Sector.
2
In the Add Virtual Sector dialog box, in the Site Name box, type a name for the site to which the virtu al sector belongs, and in the Sector Name box, type a name for the virtual sector.
3
In the Antenna Information section, do the following:
199 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Scan Receiver Data
n
n
n
n
From the Name list, choose the name of the antenna. In the X/Long box, type the x-coordinate of th e sector. This value must be within the co-ordinates of the heights file for the project. In the Y/Lat box, type the y-coordinate of th e sector. This value must be within the co-ordinates of the heights file for the project. In the Height box, type the height of the sector above ground level.
n
In the Power box, type the power of the sector.
n
In the Azimuth box, type the azimuth of the sector.
n
In the Tilt box, type the tilt of the sector.
For more information on any of these values, press the F1 key.
4
Click OK.
To view or modify sector information You can view information about any of the serving sectors in the Serving Site/Sector tree view. The information that is displayed ori ginally is the information associated with that sector in Mentum Planet. When you modify information in the Sector Information section of the Scan Receiver - Allocate Records to Sectors dialog box, you are modifying only the data associated with the scan receiver data file. You are not changing the values assigned to the sectors in Men tum Planet. Typically, you would modify this data when you know that a sector that actually exists (and was used to collect the scan receiver data) has different values than those assigned in Mentum Planet.
1
In the Scan Receiver - Allocate Records To Sectors dialog box, in the Servin g Site/Sector Inf ormation tree view, choose the sector. The Sector Information displays the information for the chosen s ector.
2
If you want to modify the sector information, type new values in any of the edita ble boxe s, and click Apply.
Mentum Planet User Guide 200
Chapter 7
To allocate scan receiver records to sectors 1
In the Records section, choose the By Distance or By Path Loss option for assigning records where there is more than one possible match. See “Allocating scan receiver data to sectors” for more inform ation on these options.
2
Do one of the following: n
n
To allocate records to all sector s, in the Serving Site/Sector Information tree view, choose the top-le vel node and in the Records section , click Allocate. The Serving Site/Sector Information tree view is updated to show the number of records that have been assigned to all sectors in parentheses following the sector names . To allocate record s to a single sector only, in th e Serving Site/Sector Information tree view , choose a sector an d in the Records section , click Allocate. The Serving Site/Sector Information tree view is updated to show the number of records that have been assigned to the chosen sector in parentheses following the sector name.
NOTE: If you click Allo cate, but you have no t yet looked up secto rs, the Scan Receiver tool automatically looks up sectors before allocating records.
NOTE: If you want to hide sectors that have not been al located, in the Serving Site/Sector Information tree view, right-click the top-level node, and choose Hide All Unmatched Sectors. You can view all sectors by right-clicking th e top-level node again and choosing Show All Sectors.
NOTE: You can also allocate records by right-clicking a carrier n ode in the Site/Sector Infor mation tree v iew and c hoosing Allocate Records by Minimum Distance or Allocate Records by Minimum Path Loss. This option is only available if you have looked up sectors automatically or assigned sectors manually first.
201 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Scan Receiver Data
To view the scan receiver records You can view the scan receiver data records associated with a sector or a carrier node. n
In the Scan Receiver- Allocate Records to Sectors dialog box, in the Serving Site/Sector Information tree view, right-click the item and choose Browse Records.
A Scan Receiver Browser win dow opens, showing the records associated with the item that you chose.
To unassign sectors n
In the Serving Site/Sector Information tree view, choose the sector , and in the Sectors section , click UnassignSector.
You can also unassign a sector by right-clicking the sector and choosing Unassign Sector.
To modify the display in the Scan Receiver tree view By default, when you assign sectors to carrier nodes, the sectors are added to the Serving Site/Sector Inf ormation tree view under each c arrier node. You can reverse the order to display the carrier nodes under the sectors. n
In the Scan Receiver - Allocate Records to Sectors dialog box, in the Serving Site/Sector Information section, rightclick the top-level nod e, and choose Toggle View.
You can restore the srcinal view by right-clicking the top-level node and choosing Toggle View again.
Mentum Planet User Guide 202
Chapter 7
Exporting scan receiver data to surveys After you have allocated scan recei ver data to sectors, you can export the scan receiver data to one or more surveys. For information on allocating scan receiver data to sector s, see “Allocating scan receiver data to sectors” . When you export the scan receiver d ata to a survey, the latit ude, longitude, signal stren gth, and sector header information are exported. You can choose one of the following options for export: n
n
With Assignment—creates an assignment fi le with the survey assigned to the matched sector (see “To export a survey assignment file” for details on assignment files). Without Assignment—does not create an assignment file
For more information on what you can do w ith the export ed surveys, see “Chapter 3: Managing Survey Data”. NOTE: The Export to Survey function f or scan receiver data files is subject to the sampling rates of the srcinal sc an receiver dat a files. The equipment used to create the srcinal scan receiver data files is not always configured to sample data with enough samples for quality model tuni ng purposes (for example, to satisfy the Lee Criteria).
To export scan receiver data to surveys 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Field Measurement Data node, then expa nd the Scan Receiver node.
2
Right-click the scan r eceiver data node you want to view and choose one of the following: n
Export To Surve y
Wit h Assignment
n
Export To Surve y
Wit hout Assignmen t
The scan receiver data is converted to on e or more surveys. The exported surveys are grouped under the Surveys RSSI node. The name of the group is the same as the scan receiver data name. Surveys with invalid h eader
203 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Scan Receiver Data
information are identi fied by a red icon in the Project Explorer. A warning message identifies the surveys with invalid headers.
Mentum Planet User Guide 204
Chapter 8 Managing Scanner Survey Data Scanner survey data consists of data relating to the location and signal strength of multiple carriers. A scanner collects only information related to signal strength and is never involved in an actual call. The scanner survey data features of Mentum Planet are part of the AMDP module. For details on scan receiver data, which is similar to scanner survey data, but has a different set of functionality, see “Managing Scan Receiver Data”. This chapter covers the following topics:
Unde rstanding scanne r survey data
207
Workflow for managing scanner surve y data
208
Importing scanne r surveydata
209
Exporting scanne r surve y data to surve ys
211
Mentum Planet User Guide 206
Chapter 8
Understanding scanner survey data Scanner survey equipm ent enables network operators to collect reporting and measurement data. Typically, scanner survey equipment takes measuremen ts along a defined route over a period of time. The use of sc anner survey e quipment in operational cellular networks is a common network optimization practice. Scanner survey data consists of records organized into columns. Mentum Planet enables you to work with and analyze scanner survey data to increase the accuracy of predictions. For example, you can compare a scanner survey value again st network analysis layers that contain the same valu e, or you can export scanner survey data to a survey and use the survey to increase the accuracy of Mentum Planet predictions. NOTE: If you are importi ng .aod files, you must have the JDSU E6474A Wireless Network Optimization Software installed on the same computer as Mentum Planet.
Input file requirements for scanner survey receive r data The scanner survey data that you want to import into Mentum Planet must: n
use a technology that is supported by Mentum Planet and is enabled in your project. All technologies are supported except TDMA-F DMA, Fixed WiMAX, and Generic.
n
overlap the heights file for the project
n
be in one of the follow ing formats:
n
n
.aod
n
.csv
n
.tab
n
.TEMS_LOG
contain data from only one scanner sur vey (if you have c ombined data from multiple scanner sur veys, the scanner survey tools do not distinguish between the measurements taken by each one, and treat the data as though it came from a single scanner survey)
207 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Scanner Survey Data
Workflow for managing scanner survey data This workflow explains the steps involved in managing scanner survey data.
Step 1
Import scanner survey data. See “Importing scanner survey data” .
Step 2
If required, export the data to a survey. See “Exporting scanner survey data to surveys” .
Mentum Planet User Guide 208
Chapter 8
Importing scanner survey data The Scanner Survey Data Import Wizard guides y ou through the process of importing your scanner survey data. NOTE: This procedure may vary slightly depen ding on the type of data that you are importing. You can view the import log for details on the import process.
To import scanner survey data 1
2
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Field Measurement Data node. Right-click Scanner Survey and choose Import. The Scanner Survey Data Import Wizard opens.
3
On the Choose The Data Files You Want To Use value from the File Format list.
page, choose a
4
Click Add, locate the files you wan t to import, and click Open.
5
Click Next and, on the Select Technology page, choose the technology of the imported data. You can import data from all tec hnologies exc ept Fixed W iMAX, TDMA-FDMA, and Generic.
6
Click Next and choose the coordinate system of the scanner survey data being imported. The coordinate system is saved in a .coo file for each scanner survey data file.
7
As required, do one of the following: n
If you are importing AOD data, on the Scanner Survey AOD Device page, choose the device type fr om the list and click Next. An XML file is created from each f ile you chose. This step may take some time to complete.
n
If you are importing TEMS_LOG data, on the Device page,
209 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Scanner Survey Data
n
8
On the Select Coordinate System page, choose one of the following options: n
Use Network Coordinate System —to use the coordinate
n
system of the site data. Use Geodata Coordinate System —to use the coordinate system of the height file.
n
9
If you are importing AOD data, on the Scanner Survey AOD Device page, choose the device type from the list and click Next.
Select A Coordinate System —to select a coordinate system.
Click Finish. The scanner survey data file is added as a new node under the Scanner Survey node. The name of the new node is the same as the name of the file you imported. If you imported more than one file, the name of the new node is the name of the first file.
Mentum Planet User Guide 210
Chapter 8
Exporting scanner survey data to surveys After you have imported scann er survey data, you can export the data file to one or more surveys. Depending on the nature of the data you are exporting , more than one survey may be created. The settings that are available in the export process enable you to modify the scanner survey data so that the exported survey data more closely meets your requirements. For example, there are numerous options for filtering the data that is to be exported. You can also averag e survey data. Once the data has been exported, see “Chapter 4: Managing Survey Data” for information on what you can do with the exported surveys. The Export to Survey function for scanner survey data files is subject to the sampling rates of the srcinal scanner survey data files. The equipment used to create the srcinal scanner survey data is not always configured to sample data with enough samples for quality model tuning pu rposes (for example, to s atisfy the Lee Criteria).
To export scanner survey data to surveys 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, expand the Field Measurement Data node, then expa nd the Scanner Survey node.
2
Right-click the scanner survey data node you want to export and choose Export to Survey . The Scanner Data Export to Survey Wizard opens.
3
On the Welcome page, click Next.
4
On the Selecting Sectors page, specify the sectors on which you w ant to filter the data by choosing one of the following options in the Sector Selection section: n
n
All cdma2000 Sectors to filter on all sectors in the projects. Current Selection if you have selected specific sectors in the Map window.
211 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Scanner Survey Data
n
n
n
5
Flag Filtering if you have defined and assigned flags to sectors. Enable the Invert Conditions check box to select those sectors for which the applied conditions do not apply. Group Selection if you have defined and created groups. Query Selection if you have defined and created sector queries.
In the Band Filtering section, enable the bands you want to include in your sector selection. The sectors on which the data will be filtered are displayed in the Selected Sectors list.
6 7
Click Next. On the Choose How You Want the Data Bound page, do one of the following: n
n
To use an existing template that defi nes how to map the scanner survey data to Mentum Planet data, click Load Template , locate the template file, and click Open. Manually define how to map the s canner survey data to the Mentum Planet data. every required field inPlanet the table, in the cellFor and choose the Mentum field click to which it must be mapped. Every mandatory field in the Bindin g Status column must have a scanner survey data field mapped to it.
8
If you want to save the cur rent mapping configuration to a template, click Save as Template , navigate to where the template file is to be stored, enter a nam e in File Name , and click Save.
9
Click Next.
10 On the First Stage Filtering Settings page, enable any of the following check boxes and define the required values in the associat ed text boxes: n
Filter Based on Received Signal Strength —filters the survey data based on the defined limits of received minimum
Mentum Planet User Guide 212
Chapter 8
and maximum strength. n
Filter Based On Ec/Io —filters the survey data based on defined limits for the minimum and maximum Ec/Io.
11 Click Next. 12 On the Second Stage Filtering Settings page, enable any of the following check boxes and define the required values in the associated text boxes: n
n
n
n
n
n
n
Filter Based On Received Sign al Strength —filters the survey data based on the defined limits of received minimum and maximum signal strength. Filter Based On Free Space Path Loss— filters the survey data based on a maximum possible signal strength determined by a free space path loss calculation between the serving sector and the location. Measurements that exceed the maximum p ossible value are discarded during filtering. Filter Based On Ec/Io —filters the survey data based on the defined minimum and maximum Ec/Io. Filter Based On Distance —filters the survey data based on the minimum and maximum linear distance that the s urvey point must be from the serving sector location. Survey points that are located within this distance are discarded during filtering. Filter Based On Anten na Beamwidth —filters the survey data based on the angle of incidence of the survey point and the serving sector antenna. Survey points that fall outside of an area defined by the antenna beamwidth (3dB lim its) plus the angle from the serving sector are discarded during filtering. Filter Based On R egressio n —filters the survey data based on the maximum permitted distance from the regression line for t he regression analysis of the Received Signal Strength against the distance for the individual survey only. Values outside of this value from the regression line are discarded during filtering.
Remove Data In Defined A reas —removes survey data points falling in the area defined by the area vector file. This is a MapInfo format file (.tab) made up of ellipses or polygons.
213 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Scanner Survey Data
13 If you are filtering based on defined areas, C lick Browse to locate the vector file and click Open.
14 Click Next. 15 On the Survey Averaging Settings page, enable the Perform Survey Averaging check box if you want to define the minimum separation between data points.
16 If you are averaging survey data, do one of the following: n
n
Define a value in the Survey Averaging Distance box. Click Calculate to display the Survey Averaging Distance Calculation dialog box.
17 If you are using the Sur vey Averaging Distance Calculation di alog box, define values for the Carrier Bandwidth, Frequency of Operation, and Delay Spread (a value that corresponds to the reflection environment in the field), and click OK. The dialog closes and the recommended averaging distance is placed in the Survey Averaging Distance box on the Survey Averaging Settings page.
18 Click Finish. The scanner survey data is converted to one or m ore surveys. The exported surveys are group ed under the Surveys RSSI node. The name of the group is the same as the scanner survey data name. Surveys with invalid header information are identified by a red icon in the Project Explorer.
Mentum Planet User Guide 214
Chapter 9 Generating Predictions Predictions use a propagation model, terrain and clutter information, and general sector se ttings including the power, antenna, and azimuth to predict the signal strength and path loss of a sector at any location where the signal exceeds the defined minimum level. Path loss and signal strength predictions are used in network analyses to determine cove rage and other metrics. The procedure for generatin g analysis layers varies, depending on the tec hnology. For information on generating analysis layers, see the appropriate User Guide. This chapter covers the following topics:
Understanding path loss and signal strength predictions Path lossa nd signals tre ngth file s
217 218
Choosingapredictionmode
221
De finingoutputse ttings
222
Ge ne ratingpre dictions
224
Viewing predictions from the Project Ex plore r
227
Vie wing predictions from t he View men u Displaying, filtering, and deleting predictions
228 231
Mentum Planet User Guide 216
Chapter 9
Understanding path loss and signal strength predictions When you generate a networ k analysis, Mentum Planet analyzes the path loss predictions and, depend ing on the technology, the signal strength predi ctions for each sector to generate analysis layers. You can generate and view predi ctions prior to and separate from an analysis, or you can generate them as required, as part of an analysi s. For more info rmation, see “Generating predictions” . By default, Mentum Planet checks to make s ure that valid pr ediction files are available when you gen erate an analysis. If you have not generated pr edictions or the files have been deleted or are out of date, they are generated as par t of the analysis. The process for generating network analyses and the analysis layers that are available varies depending on the tec hnology. For information on generating network analyses, see the appropriate Use r Guide for the technology you are using . Predictions and analysis layers are available to view or to use as inputs for other Mentum Planet tools, including the Neighbor List Generator and the Interference Matrix Generator. For more information, see “Viewing prediction s from the Project Explorer”. TIP: You can use the Prediction Manager to remove prediction fi les that are no longer valid or are no longer required. For more information, see “Displaying, filtering, and deleting pred ictions” .
217 Mentum Planet User Guide
Generating Predictions
Path loss and signal strength files The following sections describe path loss files, signal strength files, and combined signal strength files.
Path loss files When you generate pr edictions, a set of path loss files (a .ppf f ile and a HashParameters.txt file) is created based on the site and sector settings. If the sector settin gs for th e site are the same, only one set of path loss files is generated for the site. Path loss files use the following naming convention: ___ For example, Site_1_3_225_20000.bin is a path loss file for Site_1, sector 3, using a grid resolution of 2 25, as well as a Distance of 20 km. The grid resolution number is calculated using various inputs and isn’t the grid resolution itself. If the sector settings are the same, the sector design ation in the file name indicates the first sector, but all sectors are includ ed in the prediction. The HashParameters.txt file that lists the parameters used in the prediction is also created. Each set of path loss files is stored in a separate folder within the Bin folder. The folder names include the Site ID, Sector ID, and a unique ID to differentiate between p redictions. When you regenerate predictions, new path loss files are created, and any existing f iles and folders are left intact. NOTE: High resolution grids can result in very large pathloss files.
Signal strength files Signal strength predictions are based on the path loss values and the associated se ctor properties. Signal strength files are used for a limited number of functions (for example, viewing predictions and GSM analysis) and are created only as they are needed.
Mentum Planet User Guide 218
Chapter 9
When needed, a set of signal strength files (a .grd fi le and a .tab file) is created using the following naming convention: ___.grd and .tab By default, signal strength files are deleted wh en you close the project. You can keep default power signal strength files permanently by selecting signal strength as an additional layer on the Advanced Options tab of the Project Settings dialog box. Only one signal strength file is kept per sector and power. When signal streng th files are kept, they are saved in the project’s Sign alStrength or Temp\SignalStrength folder. All the signal strength files of a sector reside in the same folder. For example, \Temp\SignalStrength\Site 1\Site 1_3_1_Total.grd is a signal strength gr id file for the Site 1, sector 3, antenna 1 total power.
Combined signal strength files When you view the predictions for a site, a combined set of signal strength files for all of the sectors at the site is c reated. The combined files are located in the Temp\SignalStrength\ folder. The following table provides a description of the combined layer types and the file name conventions. Table 1 Combined signal strength layers Lay e r Combined Base Station Signal Strength
Desc ription and F ile Nam e Composite coverage of the signal strength for the selected base station at a specified power. Some powers are only available for certain technologies. For more information, see the appropriate User Guide for the technology you are using. CBS___ .grd
Combined Sector/Repeater Signal
Composite coverage of the signal
Strength
strength for the selected sector,
219 Mentum Planet User Guide
Generating Predictions
Lay er
Desc ription and F ile Nam e including its repeaters, at a specified power. Some powers are only available for ce rtain technologi es. For more information, see the appropriate User Guide for the technology you are using. CSR___ .grd and .tab
Mentum Planet User Guide 220
Chapter 9
Choosing a prediction mode Propagation models cannot always account for the complexities of signal propagation in urban environments. Hence, to predict more acc urately how a signal will behave, you can merge survey and prediction data. This is valuable because survey data represents the actual coverage provided by the networ k, improving the accuracy of your predictions. When you configu re sectors, you can define whether to use model or mer ged predictions by enabling the Merged check box and specifying an interpol ation distance. When the check box is cleared , modeled predictions are generated using the assigned propagation model. When the check is enabled, modeled predictions are merged with survey data. See “Generating predictions”. After generating merged predictions, two pathloss files and two signal streng th files are generated for each site or sector.
Modeled predictions Modeled predictions are calculated using the propagation model assigned to the site or sector. For information on propagation modeling, see the appropriate User Guide for the technology you are using.
Merged predictions Merged predictions are calculated using unmasked survey data and path loss values converted from sign al strength readin gs. Bins that are outside the Interpolation Distance (defined in the Site Editor) contain mod el prediction values. Bins that are within the interpola tion distance contain interpolated values calculated by merging survey data and model prediction values.
221 Mentum Planet User Guide
Generating Predictions
Defining output settings You can choose to define addi tional output options, such as advanced prediction layers and the prediction thresholds to use when generating predictions. Analysis output settings can be defined on a per-project basis using the Advanced Options tab in the Project Settings dialog box (see “Advanced prediction layers” ).
Advanced prediction layers When you generate pr edictions, you can choose to include a number of advanced prediction layers that provide addition al information about the sites specified in the analysis. When you generate advanced pr ediction layers, a folder with the same name as the layer type—for example, Azimuth—is crea ted in the root of your project folder. A .grd file and a .tab file are stored for each of the advanced layer types listed in Table 1. Table 1 Advanced prediction layers Lay er Azimuth
Desc ription and F ile Nam e The bearing between the site and the receiver, corrected for map projection. AZ_____
Inclination
The angle below the horizontal from the transmitting antenna to the receiving antenna. IN_____
Path Loss
Loss or attenuation of the electromagnetic wave between the transmitter and the receiver. This may be due to variou s factors including free space path loss, refraction, reflection, or diffraction of the transmitted signal. PL_____
Mentum Planet User Guide 222
Chapter 9
You can also enable the Signal Strength check box to preserve signal strength layers. Layers are generated using the default power (i.e., the predi ction power) during prediction generation (i.e., whenever you generate predictions, signal strength files are also generated). Signal strength files are saved in the Signal Strength folder within the project folder . When you clear this check box, signal strength layers are saved in the temporary folder within the project folder and are deleted on project close.
To define analysis output settings 1
ChooseEdit
Project Settings .
2
In the Project Settings dialog box, click the Advanced Options tab.
3
In the Additional Layers section, enable the check boxes for th e advanced prediction layers that you want to generate.
4
To specify the clutter grid to use when defining environment settings, in the Environments s ection, choose one of t he following options: n
n
Use Primary Clutter Grid —uses the clutter grid defined in the Project Settings dialog box. Use User-Defined Grid —uses the grid you sp ecify. For example, you could use a grid created using the Environment Splicer.
Environment settings are used in Monte Carlo simulations.
5
Click OK. For more information on the prediction layers that you can generate, see “Advanced prediction layers”. For information on the Sharing section of the Advanced Options tab, see the appropriate User Guide for the technology you are using.
223 Mentum Planet User Guide
Generating Predictions
Generating predictions Path loss and signal strength predictions are a prerequisite to network analyses. You can generate pr edictions prior to, or as part of a network analysis. By default, prediction files are only gen erated as required; however, you can choose to generate all prediction files, regardless of their status. You can greatly increase the accuracy of predictions by generating merged predictions. To do so, you must im port at least one surv ey, associat e it with your project, and assig n it to a sector. For more information, see “Chapter 3: Managing Survey Data”. When you are generating merged predictions, the following files are c reated in the Site folder (e.g., Site_1_1_6DCCCABFE512183CA1B8C6A) within the Signal Strength folder of your project: n
a .grd file and a .tab file for the modeled outp ut
n
a .grd file and a .tab file for the merged output.
NOTE: By default, predictions are generated at the same resolution as the primary heights file specified in the Project Settings.
To generate predictions 1
In the Project Explorer , right-click the Sites node and choose Generate Predictions.
2
In the Select Sectors dialog box, specify the sectors for which you want to generate predictions by choosing one of the following options in the Sector Selection section: n
n
n
All Sectors if you want to include all sectors in the project. Current Selection if you have selected specific sectors in the Map window. Flag Filtering if you have defined and assigned flags to sectors. Enable the Invert Conditions check box to select those sectors for which the applied conditions do not apply.
Mentum Planet User Guide 224
Chapter 9
3
n
Group Selection if you have defined and created groups.
n
Query Selection if you have defined and created sector queries.
In the Band Filtering section, enable the bands you want to include in your sector selection. The sectors for which predictions will be generated are displayed in the Selected Sectors list.
4
Click OK. The Prediction Generator dialog box opens.
5
If you only want to check the statu s of the current set of prediction files, click Check .
6
To generate predictions, do one of the following:
225 Mentum Planet User Guide
Generating Predictions
n
n
If you want to generate only pred ictions that are missing or out of date, click Generate. If you want to generate pred ictions for all sectors regardl ess of their status, click Regenerate. Predictions will be generated or regenerated only for the sectors and repeaters listed in the Prediction Generator dialog box. The Progress section of the Prediction Generator dialog box provides an indication of th e overall progress, as well as the time elapsed and an estimate of the time rem aining. If errors occur during prediction generation , the Messages box opens displaying error messages.
7
To close the Messages box if required, click Hide Messages .
8
When the generation of predictions is complete, click Close .
TIP: If you want to keep working in Mentum Planet while the pred ictions are being generated, you can minimize the Prediction Generator dial og box. When you minimize the dialog box, a Prediction Generator icon appears at the bottom of the Pro ject Explorer. Click the icon to restore the dialog box.
Mentum Planet User Guide 226
Chapter 9
Viewing predictions from the Project Explorer You can view prediction layers for individual sites, sectors, or repeaters from the Project Explorer. This is a fast and easy way to view predictions in the same Map window. You can display prediction layers for various powers depending on the technology of the sector. NOTE: You cannot view pred ictions from the Project Explorer wh en you use the Shift key to select multiple sectors or sites.
To view predictions for a sector 1
In the Project Explorer, in the Sites categor y, expand the Sites node.
2
Right-click a sector, choose View Sector Predictio ns, and choose one of the following: n
Modeled
—to view a prediction layer for the chosen
power. The options availabl e depend on the technology of the sector. n
Merged —to view a merged prediction layer based on survey data and model pr ediction values for the chosen power. The options available depend on the technology of the sector.
The prediction layers for the sector are displayed in the Map window.
227 Mentum Planet User Guide
Generating Predictions
Viewing predictions from the View menu You can display prediction layers for various powers dependin g on the technology of the sec tor. You can also display pr edictions in a new Map window. TIP: You can set the translucency of the predi ction layer you displa y by defining user preferences technology you are using. for viewing. See the appropriate U ser Guide for the
To view predictions using the View menu 1
Choose View
Predictions
.
The View Predictions dialog box opens.
2
To view predictions for sites, select the sites in the Map window and click the Base Stations tab.
3
In the list box, choose the site entr ies for which you want to see predictions. The entries in the List box for a site are based on the technologies and frequency bands assigned to that site. You can choose multiple site entries by dragging the pointer.
Mentum Planet User Guide 228
Chapter 9
4
In the Type section, choose the type of pred iction you want to display. If the generated pred iction is a modeled prediction, the Merged option is not available.
5
From the Power list, choose which power you want to view.
6
To display the prediction layer in a new Map window, enable the New Window check box. For each site entry chosen in the List box, a combined prediction opens in a new Map window.
7
Click View to view the predictions for the chosen site entries.
8
To view predictions for sectors, click the Sectors tab, and in the list box, choose the sectors for which you want to view predictions.
9
Repeat Step 4 to Step 7. When you select multiple sectors that assigned diff erent technologies, the only power available is total power.
10 To view prediction s for a site or se ctor not currently displayed in th e View Predictions dialog box, choose a site or sector in the Map window and click the appropriate tab in the View Predictions dialog box.
11 Repeat Step 4 to Step 7. 12 Click Save Settings to save the settings currently chosen in the View Predictions dialog box.
13 To view details about a pred iction that is curren tly displayed in a Map window or to close displayed p redictions, click the Displayed tab and do any of the following: n
n
Click Close All Tables to close all predictions currently being displayed in a Map window. In in the list box, choose the pred ictions you want to close and click Close Table .
You can choose multiple prediction s by dragging the pointer.
229 Mentum Planet User Guide
Generating Predictions
14 When you have finished viewing predictions, click OK. TIP: To view predictions for a site, you can also click the View Predictions button on the Network toolbar and then click an individual site in the Map window. You can also right-click a site in the Map window and use the commands from the shortcut menu to generate and view predictions or open the Prediction Manager.
Mentum Planet User Guide 230
Chapter 9
Displaying, filtering, and deleting predictions You can use the Prediction Manager to view a list of the predictions that have been generated for a project, and remove any files that you no longer req uire. You can view a list of all of the predictions that have been generated for a project or you can use the Filter dialog box to display only specific predictions based on the file type and status, and the sector setting s. The Prediction Manag er dialog box displays a number of different properties for each prediction, including the Type, Site Name, Sector Name, and Model Name, to help you identify the prediction s. You can also view a detailed list of the proper ties associated with each prediction. NOTE: You cannot view detailed proper ties for predictions that were generated prior to Mentum Planet version 4.1.
TIP: When you select one or mor e rows in the Prediction Manager, the status bar at the bottom of the window indicates the number of files selected and the total amount of disk space used by the files.
TIP: If your project contains a larg e number of predictions, you can filter the list of predictions based on a number of d ifferent criteria. For example, you could filter the list of predictions by file date and remove any predictions that were more than two weeks old.
To display, filter, and delete predictions 1
ChooseTools
Prediction Manager.
The Prediction Manag er dialog box opens with no predictions displayed.
2
If you want to display predictions based on a defined criteria, choose View F ilter and, in the Filter dialog box, and do the following: n
From the File Status list, choose the status of the file on which you want to filter.
n
Enable the check box next to the properties up on which you want to filter and define or choose the filter criteria.
231 Mentum Planet User Guide
Generating Predictions
3
In the Filter dialog box, click OK. A list of predictions is displayed based on the options you chose.
4
If you want to display all predictions that have been generated for the project, in the Prediction Manager, chooseVie w Show All.
5
If you want to in limit columns or change the order in which they are displayed thethe Predi ction Manager, choose View Columns, do any of the follo wing, and then click OK: n
n
6
To define which columns are displayed, enable the check boxes beside the items in the Visible Columns list. To define the order in w hich the columns are displayed, choose the columns in the Visible Columns list and click Add. Use the Up and Down b uttons to arrange the items, and then in the Sorting Order section, choose either Ascending or Descending.
If you want to view detailed information for a prediction, choose a row in the tabl e, and then choose View Properties . The Prediction Proper ties dialog box opens.
7
Do any of the following and then click OK. n
n
n
8
Click the Ca tegorized button to display the properties in grouped categories. Click the Alphabetic button to display the properties in alphabetical order. Click any row in th e table to v iew a description of th e property at the bottom of the dialog box.
To delete predictions, choose one or more rows, and then choose Predict ion Delet e or press the Delete key. The predictions that you chose are deleted from the project folder.
Mentum Planet User Guide 232
Chapter 9
TIP: There are other ways to open the Prediction M anager. You can right-click one or more sites, sectors, or groups in the Proj ect Explor er, or right-click the Sites or Flags node and choose Prediction Mana ger. A list of predictions is displayed based on the nodes you selected. No predictions are displ ayed if you use the Sites node . You can also right-click sites in the Map window and choose Prediction Manager.
TIP: You can also use the toolbar bu ttons at the top of the Prediction Man ager dialog box to access relevant commands.
233 Mentum Planet User Guide
Chapter 10 Generating Signal Strength Predictions Between Two Points Using Mentum Planet, you can focus an analysi s on two poin ts. These two points can represent, for example, a base station and a mo bile subscriber or a base station and a possible candidate site. This type of analysis can provide valuable information about the effect that changing sector heights, antenna properties, transmit power, or rain fade has on the signal path and quality. This chapter covers the following topics:
Unde rstanding point-to- point analyse s
235
Workflow for point- to-point analyse s
237
Understanding the Point-to-Point Profile Tool dialog box Ge ne rating point- to-point profile s
238 241
Understanding how to interpret a point-to-p oint profile
245
Viewing the height of clutter above the elevation profile
247
Customizing the point-to-point profile graph window
248
Displaying refl po eiction nts
250
Exporting a point-to-point graph
252
Printing point-to-point graphs
253
Saving and ope ning point-to-point profiles
254
Mentum Planet User Guide 234
Chapter 10
Understanding point-to-point analyses How a signal travels over the terrain and is attenuated by obstructions within the Fresnel zone c an have important ramifications on the overall performance of your network. To better understand the effects of c hanging the height of a s ector or modifying antenna properties, you can v isualize the signal path by generating a profile between two points, such as a base station and a mobile subscriber . Because signal strength profiles are generated on-the-fly, you do not have to generate predictions for the entire area of a sector but can focus instead on the signal path alon e. As a result, you can quickl y and easil y create a profile of the terrain (elevation or clutter), the signal streng th, the path loss, or the Fr esnel zone. In addition, you can model changes to transmitter and recei ver heigh ts, locations, or antenna parameters within the Point-to-Point Profile Tool. Once you have achieved the desired result, you can print a prof ile or export it for use in reports.
The Fresnel zone The Fresnel zone is the area around the visual line-of-sight where radio waves spread as they move out from the antenna. In the Point-to-Point dia log box, the Fresnel zone is shown as the perpendicular distance from the line of sight. Generally, each Fresnel zone is reserved for a specific type of propag ation. The first zone typically shows the obstruction an d clearance levels of the signal. The higher zones include interference that cause the srcinal signal to attenuate. The perpendicular distance is calculated as:
Where K is a constant that determines the percentage of the Fresnel zone to be shown N is the number of the Fresnel zone
235 Mentum Planet User Guide
Generating Signal Strength Predictions Between Two Points
is the wavelength calculated as c/f D is the horizontal distance from the start point 1
D is the horizontal distance from the end point 2
Mentum Planet User Guide 236
Chapter 10
Workflow for point-to-point analyses Step 1
In the Map window, choose a start point. The Point-to-Point Profile Tool dialog box opens.
Step 2
In the Map window, move the cursor over the map. The profile displayed in the Point-to-Point graph window will update dynamically until you click on an end point. The default profiles (i.e., elevation and clutter (if the project includes clutter)) are automati cally updated. By default, the line-of-sig ht is also displayed.
Step 3
Add additional profiles (e.g., propagation model, Fresnel zone and line-ofsight) as required.
Step 4
Customize the point-to-point profiles as required. This includes choosing color and line style.
Step 5
If required, export or print point-to-point profiles.
Step 6
Save point-to-point profiles.
NOTE: If you want to generate a sector-to-sector pr ofile, open the Point-to-Point Profile Tool by choosing Tools Point-to-Point Profile.
NOTE: When you minimize the Point-to-Point dialog box, a Point-to-Poin t icon appears at the bottom of the Project Explorer . Click the icon to restore the dialog box.
237 Mentum Planet User Guide
Generating Signal Strength Predictions Between Two Points
Understanding the Point-to-Point Profile Tool dialog box The Point-to-Point Profile Tool dialog box contains the following elements: n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
Graph window—displays the selected profi les. You can customize the look and feel of the graph window and display a legend if required. Profile pane—displays a list of profiles with the associated line color. You can view profiles by enabling the check box next to the profile or remove the profile from the graph window by clearing the check box. the Transmitter tab—displays transmitter location and frequency as well as details about the transmitting antenna. You can adjust transmitter settings and view changes in the profiles by c licking the Refresh button. the Receiver tab—displ ays the location and heigh t of the receiver as well as details about the r eceiving antenna. You can adjust antenna settings and view changes in the profiles by clicking the Refresh button. Options tab—displays an addition al geodata setting (i.e., the maintain maximum inclination setting ). It also displays additional network settings such as the earth curvature and the rain factor. Tracking tab—displays the values for the pr ofiles at a specific point. This tab is only displayed w hen you have clicked the Cursor Tracking button. Clutter legend—displays the color scheme and classes contained in the clutter file. Information bar—displays the angle, the inclination, the height of the terrain at the transmitter and the height of the terrain at the receiver as well as information about the clutter class.
For detailed information on any of these sections, press the F1 key. You can quickly access the main features of the Point-to-Point Tool using the following toolbar buttons.
Mentum Planet User Guide 238
Chapter 10
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
Refresh—redraws the profiles in the graph window based on current settings Toggle Real-time updates—upd ates the signal strength and path loss profiles on-the-fly as you move the cursor over the map. In addition, changes to the power settin g, frequency setting , or antenna settings are automatically reflected in the graph window as soon as you make a change. Toggle Profile Capture—freezes the profiles displayed in the graph window. This is useful when you want to display a differ ent profile in a second Point-to-Point Tool dialog box. View Path loss—adds the path loss profile to the graph window if you have a prediction profile listed in the Profiles list. You can view either the signal strength profile or the path loss profile at any one time. View Signal Strength—adds the signal strength profile to the graph window if you have a prediction profile listed in the Profiles list. You can view either the signal strength profile or the path loss profile at any one time. Pan—enables y ou to move the profile grap h around the graph window. Cursor Tracking—displays additional information on the Tracking tab about a specific point along a profile.
n
Zoom In—zooms in on the graph by a predefin ed factor.
n
Zoom Out—zooms out of the graph b y a predefined factor.
n
n
Toggle Legend—displays a legend in the upper r ight corner of the graph window. You turn the display off or on but you cannot change the location of the legend. Toggle Split Axes—stacks the vertical axes above each other .
239 Mentum Planet User Guide
Generating Signal Strength Predictions Between Two Points
Figure 10.1: Elements of the Point-to-Point Profile Tool dialog box
Mentum Planet User Guide 240
Chapter 10
Generating point-to-point profiles Using point-to-point profiles, you can analyze the path of the signal between two points. These two points can be a sect or and a mobile user or they can be two sectors.The Point-to-Point Profil e tool uses project information to determine which elevation and clutter gr ids to use for calculations. Signal strength values are calculated on-the-fly along the path you specify. When you enable the Use Maximum Gain check box on the Antenna tab for either the transmitter or receiver, Mentum Planet assumes that the direction of the corresponding antenna is always such that it receives with the maximum gain. If you do not enable the Use Maximum Gain check box, the gain is calculated according to the angle of departure or the angle of arrival.
To generate a point-to-point profile 1
With a Mentum Planet project open, on the RF Tools toolbar, click the Point-to-Point Profile Tool button and click in the Map window at the start point. The Point-to-Point Profile Tool dialog box opens.
2
Do one of the following: n
n
If you want to c reate a point-to-poi nt profile, in the Map window, click to define the end point of the signal path. If you want to create a sector-to-sect or profile, in the Point-toPoint Profile Tool dialog box, click the Transmitter tab, click Select Antenna, and in the Antenna Selection dialog box, choose the sector where the antenna m arks the start point, and click OK. Repeat on the Receiver tab to define the end point.
The signal path is drawn in the Map window.
3
If you want to add prediction profiles to the graph, in the Profiles pane, click the Add Prediction Profile button and do the following: n
n
In the Profile Name box, type a name for the profile From the Propagation M odel list, choose the propagation model to use for the profile and click OK.
The profile is added to the profile list and displayed in the graph window.
241 Mentum Planet User Guide
Generating Signal Strength Predictions Between Two Points
4
If you want to add a Fresnel profile to the graph, click the Add Fresnel Zone Profile button and, in the Add Fresnel Zone Profile dialog box, define the following parameters and click OK. n
Fresnel Zone— zone number. The zone number you specify depends on the type of clearance or interference you want to see. The first zone typically shows the obstruction and clearance levels of the signal. The higher zones include interference that cause the srcinal signal to attenuate.
n
n
Fresnel Constant— fixed value indicating the percentage of the Fresnel zone that will be displayed. For wireless applications, 60% is generally required. Frequency —frequency of the signal. Defining a higher frequency will reduce the amount of spread within the Fresnel zone.
Both the Fresnel zone and the line-of-sight will be added to the graph window.
5
If you want to view the path loss profile, click the View Path Loss button. The path lossline, profiright-click le is added theprofile grap hinwindow. To change the color of the profile ontothe the Profiles pane and choose Format.
6
If you want to view the signal strength profile, click the View Signal Strength button. The signal strength p rofile is added to the graph win dow. To change the color of the profile line, right-click on the profile in the Profiles pane and choose Format.
7
If you want to remove the profile from the graph window, but not delete the profile, in the Profiles pane, clear the check box next to the profile name.
8
Do any of the following and click Refresh: n
To change the heig ht or frequency of the tran smitter, override the propagation model frequency, or update antenna settings,
Mentum Planet User Guide 242
Chapter 10
click the Transmitter tab and modify transmitter and antenna settings accordingly. n
To change the height or frequency of the receiver, override the propagation model frequency, or update antenna settings, click the Receiver tab and modify transmitter and antenna settings accordingly.
For information on these tabs, press the F1 key.
9
If you want to enable the maintain maximum inclination setting, modify the earth cur vature, or change the rain factor, click the Options tab, and do any of the following: n
To calculate the “over obstacle” corrected distan ce and the angle to the top of the s ingle most s ignificant obstructing obstacle, doubleclick in the box next to Maintain Max Inclination if the current setting is False. You need to know the angle between the sector and the receiver in order to determine the actual antenna gain directed at a location. However, if the signa l gets diffracted over an interfering obstacle, the appropriate antenna gain is considered to be the angle to the top of the obstacle over which the signal was diffracted. This effect can be important, especially when the location is relatively close to the se ctor, where inclinations are relatively significant (i.e., more than -5 degrees), and the antenna pattern is very directional. If you clear this check box, the dir ect angle to the receiver is calculated.
n
Expand the Network Options node and type a value in the Earth Curvature (K Factor) box and, if required, click the arrow next to Rain Factor and specify the rain attenuation and rate.
If you want to view profiles for a diff erent signal path , click in the Map window to define a new start point and a new end point.
10 Click Refresh. The profiles in the graph window are updated.
11 ChooseFile
Exit to close the Point-to-Point Profile Tool dialog
box.
243 Mentum Planet User Guide
Generating Signal Strength Predictions Between Two Points
NOTE: You can customize the contents of the Point-to-Point Pr ofile Tool dialog box using the command s from the View menu. You can also resize the graph area by dragging its edges.
NOTE: To change the color of the F resnel profile or edit the values used in the profile, right-click on the Fresnel Prof ile in the Profiles pane and choose Format or Edit Profile. Similarly, you can change the color of the lin e-of-sight profile or the e levation profile by right-clicking the profile and choosing Form at. TIP: You can open multi ple instances of the Point-to-Point Profile Tool dialo g box when you want to view multiple pr ofiles. Use the View ► New Window in the Point-to-Point Profile Tool dialog box to open a new Point-to-Point Profile Tool dialog box or click the Point-to-Point Profile bu tton on the RF Tools toolbar. If you have two dialog boxes open and draw th e signal path in the Map window, by default, both graph windows will be updated with the s ame profile. Use the Toggle Profile Capture button to freeze the profiles in one Point-toPoint Tool dialog box.
Mentum Planet User Guide 244
Chapter 10
Understanding how to interpret a point-to-point profile There is a lot of information contained in a point-to-point profile that you can use to help better model a network. Understanding how to interpret a point-to-point profile will enable you to make the best use of the tools provided.
Figure 10.2: Example of a typical point-to-point profile
What you see In the figure, the graph window has been divided into two using the Toggle Split Axes button. The lower graph win dow displays the physical elevation and c lutter profiles along a defined line. It also displays the line-of-sight profile and the Fresnel zone. The bottom half of the Fresnel zone is red indicating that the Fresnel zone crossed
245 Mentum Planet User Guide
Generating Signal Strength Predictions Between Two Points
the elev ation profile. The upper graph window displays the signal strength profile along the same line. Using the View Pathloss toolbar bu tton, you can quickly change the profile in the upper window to show path loss instead of signal strength. You can also remove the legend from the displ ay using the Toggle Legend button.
What you can do In order to analyze diff erent scenarios, you can: n
n
n
n
change the height, power, frequency, and antenna parameters for the transmitter or receiver. change the earth curvature, rain factor, and the Maintain Max. Inclination setting. change the look and feel of the profile displ ayed in the graph window. See “To c ustomize the Point-to-Point pr ofile graph window”. zoom in or out of the graph u sing the Zoom In and Zoom Ou t buttons or the Enable Zoom command from the shortcut menu.
n
pan acrossfrom the graph usin g the Pan button or the Enab le Pan command the shortcut menu. n
enable cursor tracking. See “Exporting a point-to-point graph”.
Mentum Planet User Guide 246
Chapter 10
Viewing the height of clutter above the elevation profile In order to more accurately assess the line-of-sight and the Fresnel zone clearance along the signal path, you can view the clutter heigh t above the elev ation.
To define clutter height values 1
In the Point-to-Point Profile Tool, generate the profiles you want to display.
2
Click the Edit button beneath the clutter legend.
3
In the Clutter Height Editor , for each clutter class where you want to view the clutter heig ht above the elevation, click in the Clutter Height column, and enter the appropriate value.
4
When you have finished entering values, click OK. Clutter heights are saved in the DefaultClutterHeight.cpa file in the project Model folder.
To view clutter heights n
Do one of the follow ing: n
n
To view clutter heights above the elevation pr ofile, click the Toggle Clutter Heights button beneath the clutter legend. To view the clutter heights up to the elevation profile, click the Toggle Clutter Heights button a second time.
247 Mentum Planet User Guide
Generating Signal Strength Predictions Between Two Points
Customizing the point-to-point profile graph window You can change the colors and line styles displayed in the graph window and specify which elements of the graph you want to view.
To customize the Point-to-Point profile graph window 1
In the Point-to-Point Profile Tool, generate the profiles you want to display.
2
If you want to display two graph windows, click the Toggle Split Axes button to stack the vertical axes above each other.
3
Do one of the following: n
n
To view th e signal strength, click the View Signal Strength button. To view the path loss, click the View Pathloss button.
4
To format the color and style of profile lines, in the Profiles pane, right-click the profile and choose Format .
5
In the Line Properties Editor dialog box, define the line color, width, and style and click OK.
6
To format the axes displayed for the graph, right-click in the graph window and choose Axes Options .
7
In the Axes Options dialog box, specify the appearance of the axes and line ticks and click OK. For information on axes options, press the F1 key.
8
To display a legend in the graph window, click the Legend button.
9
To close the Point-to-Point Profile Tool dialog box, choose F ile Exit .
Mentum Planet User Guide 248
Chapter 10
To inspect individual points on a profile When you enable cursor tracking , a Tracking tab app ears at t he bottom of the Pointto-Point Tool dial og box. As you move the cursor over a pr ofile, values relative to the cursor position are displayed on the tab.
1
In the Point-to-Point Profile Tool dialog box, do one of the following: n
n
Click the Cursor Tracking button. Right-click in the graph win dow and choose Enable Cursor Tracking.
A Tracking tab appears next to the Transmitter and Receiver tabs at the bottom of the dialog box.
2
Move the cursor over the signal strength or path loss profile. Distance, elevation, and path loss or signal strength values are displayed on the Tracking tab. The values change as you move the cursor along the profile.
3
To exit the cursor tracking mode, click the Cursor Tracking button a second time.
249 Mentum Planet User Guide
Generating Signal Strength Predictions Between Two Points
Displaying reflection points You can display reflection points in a point-to-point profile to determine whether there are multipath signals between the transmitter and the receiver that would interf ere with the signal and impact your network perf ormance. You can then change the height of the receiver or transmitter in order to eliminate multipath signals.
To display reflection points 1
In the Point-to-Point Profile Tool, on the Profile toolbar, click the Display Reflection Points button.
2
To define your start point (or the transmitting sector), do one of the following: n
n
3
Click at a point in the Map w indow. Click the Transmitter tab, click the Select Sector button, choose a sector , and click OK.
To define your end point (or the receiving sector), do one of the following: n
n
Click at a point in the Map w indow. Click the Receiver tab, click the Select Sector button, choose a sector , and click OK.
If there is a multipath signal where the reflected angles between the transmitter and the receiver are the same at a point on the elevation profile, it is displayed in the point-to-poin t graph as shown in the figure. If the reflected lines intersect with the terrain , the reflection poin t is not displayed.
Mentum Planet User Guide 250
Chapter 10
Figure 10.3: Point where the reflected ang les between the transmitter and the receiver equal 1.06 degrees.
251 Mentum Planet User Guide
Generating Signal Strength Predictions Between Two Points
Exporting a point-to-point graph You can export a graph generated in the Point-to-Point Profile Tool dialog box as a graphic file or as a tex t file. Graphic file formats include .bmp, .gif, .jpeg, tiff, and .wmf files. The data export format is comma-separated value. Depending on the format, you can send outputs to the clipboar d, a printer, or a file.
To export a point-to-point graph as an image 1
In the Point-to-Point Profile Tool dialog box, choose File Export Export Im age .
2
In the Save As dialog box, do the following:
3
n
From the Save In list, choose the destination folder.
n
In the File Name box, type a name for the file.
n
From the Save As Type list, choose the format of the image.
Click Save.
To export a point-to-point graph to a text file 1
In the Point-to-Point Profile Tool dialog box, choose File Export Export Dat a .
2
In the Save As dialog box, do the following:
3
n
From the Save In list, choose the destination folder.
n
In the File Name box, type a name for the file.
n
From the Save As Type list, choose Csv Files (*.csv) .
Click Save.
Mentum Planet User Guide 252
Chapter 10
Printing point-to-point graphs You can customize the print layout of point-to-point graphs you want to send to a printer.
To print a point-to-point graph 1
In the Point-to-Point Profile Tool dialog box, choose F ile Setup to define the layout of the graph print out.
2
In the Page Setup dialog box, define the paper size, source, orientation and margins.
3
Do one of the following: n
n
4
Page
If you want to preview the prin t layout, in the Page Setup d ialog box, click OK and go to Step 4. If you want to send the poin t-to-point graph to the printer, click the Printer button, review the printer settings, and click OK.
ChooseFi le
Print Prev iew.
253 Mentum Planet User Guide
Generating Signal Strength Predictions Between Two Points
Saving and opening point-to-point profiles You can save a profile for later use when you want to make comparisons between profiles. Profiles are saved as .xml files.
To save a point-to-point profile 1
In the Point-to-Point Profile Tool dialog box, choose File Save Profile .
2
Navigate to the folder where you want to save the profile, in the File Name box, type a name for the profile, and click Save.
To open a point-to-point profile 1
In the Point-to-Point Profile Tool dialog box, choose File Open.
2
Locate the .xml file you want to open and click Open.
Mentum Planet User Guide 254
Chapter 11 Generating Propag ation Model Analyses A propagation model analysis compares prediction results with survey data. This type of analysis enables you to verify modeled network predictions against real-w orld survey data. You can view the results from a n analysis in tabular format as well as in a variety of charts. You can also export the results to Microsoft Excel for further manipulation. The propagation model analysis features of Mentum Planet are part of the AMDP module. This chapter covers the following topics:
Unde rstanding propagation mode l analyse s
257
Workflow for generating a propagation model analysis
259
De fininganalysiss e ttings
260
Ge ne rating a propagation mode l analysis
263
Vie winganalysis re sults
265
Mentum Planet User Guide 256
Chapter 11
Understanding propagation model analyses A propagation model analysis calculates the differences between surveys and predictions for each survey point. By validating predictions against survey data you can determine whether the propagation models you are using are correct for the environment or whether the survey values are reasonable. For each survey point, the difference between the value contained within th e survey for a given point and the signal strength prediction at the bin is calculated using the equation:
Difference = - In cases where there are several survey points contained within one prediction bin, the analysis generates a result for each value. There is no interpolation of prediction values across a single bin.
Analysis results Analysis results are color-coded so that the status of each key performance indicator (KPI) is easily recognized.
Figure 11.1: An example of the Analysis Results dialog box with results color-coded for readability.
257 Mentum Planet User Guide
Generating Propagation Model Analyses
The following colors are used: n
n
n
n
Gray —indicates that there is insufficient data. Green (Good)—indicates that the amount of data available exceeds the minimum required and the quality parameter meets or exceeds the level defined in the Propagation Analysis Model Settings for the Good status. Yellow (Poor)—indicates that the amount of data available exceeds the minimum required, and the quality param eter is less than that required for the Green status but meets or exceeds the level required as defined for the Poor status. Red (Unreliable)—indicates that the amount of data available exce eds t he minimum required and the quality parameter is less than that required for the Poor status as defined in the Propagation Analysis Model Settings.
You can define the thresholds for each color. See “Defining analysis settings” .
Mentum Planet User Guide 258
Chapter 11
Workflow for generating a propagation model analysis This workflow explains the steps involved in generating a propagati on model analysis. Step 1
Ensure survey data is available in Mentum Planet. Propagation model analyses use survey data from the Surveys RSSI node of the Operational Data category in the Project Explorer.
Step 2
Generate predictions. See “Chapter 8: Generating Predictions”.
Step 3
Bind the surveys that are being using to the appropriate sectors. See “To update survey header information using sector proper ties” and “To assign a survey to a s ector”.
Step 4
Define analysis settings. See "Defining analysis settings" on the facing page
Step 5
Generate an analysis. See "Generating a propag ation model analysis" on page 263.
Step 6
Review the analysis results. See "Viewing analysis results" on page 265 .
Step 7
If required, export analysis results to Excel.
259 Mentum Planet User Guide
Generating Propagation Model Analyses
Defining analysis settings You define the thresholds for each key performance indicator (KPI) in order to color-code analysis repor ts. This provides you with a visual refer ence of analysis results so that you can easily determine the validity of the information.
To define analysis settings 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Network Analyses category, right-click Propagation Model Analyses and choose Settings. The Propagation Model Analysis Settings dialog box opens.
2
For each KPI on the Statistics page, do the following: n
n
Enable the associated Display check box if you want to display the KPI in the analysis results. Type a value in each thr eshold box.
See “Appendix C: Propagation Model Analysis Equations” for information on how each statistic is calculated.
3
Click the Number of Points tab.
Mentum Planet User Guide 260
Chapter 11
The values you define on this tab represent the minimum number of survey points that need to be analyzed in order for the Number of Points KPI to be classified as good (i.e., displayed in green in the results).
4
In the Model section, type a valu e in the Overall box for the minimum number of points required for the propagation model.
5
In the Sector section, type values in the foll owing boxes to define the minimum number of points for the associated KPI: n
6
Overall—for the sector
n
Per Clutter —for a clutter class in the sector
n
Per Distance —for a distance range in the sector
In the Survey section, type values in the foll owing boxes to define the minimum number of points for the associated KPI: n
n
Overall—for the survey Per Clutter/Distance —for each clutter class in each distance range in the survey
n
Per Clutter —for a clutter class in the survey
n
Per Distance —for a distance range in the survey
7
Enable the Display Column to display the number of points in the analysis results.
8
Click the Reliability tab. The purpose of the Reliability indicator is to provide an assessment of the reliability of data. This is derived from the numb er of survey points in the sample and the number of unreliable points based on the variance of the errors. See “Reliability” on page 39 0. The values you define on this tab represent the thresholds that define how the Reliability indicator is classified in the results.
9
In the Model for the Overall KPI, type a value in each threshold box section, for the propagation model.
261 Mentum Planet User Guide
Generating Propagation Model Analyses
10
In the Sector section, type a value in each thr eshold box for the associated KPI: n
11
n
Per Clutter —for a clutter class in the sector
n
Per Distance —for a distance range in the sector
In the Survey section, type a value in each thresh old box for the associated KPI: n
n
12
13
Overall—for the sector
Overall—for the survey Per Clutter/Distance —for each clutter class in each distance range in the survey
n
Per Clutter —for a clutter class in the survey
n
Per Distance —for a distance range in the survey
Enable the Display Column to display a Reliability column in the analysis results. Click the Distance tab. The values on this tab represent the ranges from a survey point to the sector.
14
Click Add to add a new distance range.
Mentum Planet User Guide 262
Chapter 11
Generating a propagation model analysis You can generate a propagation model analysis based on the following par ameters: n
n
Sector—The analysis is run on all surveys assigned to the chosen sector(s). If a chosen sector h as no assign ed surveys, it is not included in the analysis. Survey—The analysis is run on all sectors that are included in the chosen survey(s).
To generate a propagation model analysis from sectors 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Network Analyses category, rightclick Propagation Model Analyses and chooseNew F rom Sectors. The Propagation Model Analysis Sector Selection dialog box opens.
2
Specify the sectors for which you want to generate analyses by choosing one of the following options in the Sector Selection section: n
n
n
3
All Sectors to generate analyses for all sectors in the project. Current Selection if you have selected specific sectors in the Map window. Flag Filtering if you have defined and assigned flags to sectors. Enable the Invert Conditions check box to select those sectors for which the applied conditions do not apply.
n
Group Selection if you have defined and created groups.
n
Query Selection if you have defined and created sector queries.
In the Band Filtering section, enable the bands you want to include in your sector selection. The sectors that will be included in the analysis are displayed in the Selected Sectors list.
4
Click Generate.
263 Mentum Planet User Guide
Generating Propagation Model Analyses
The Analysis Results dialog box opens and a new analysis node is created in the Proj ect Explorer. The name of the new an alysis node is analysis_ .
To generate a propagation model analysis from surveys 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Network Analyses category, right-click Propagation Model Analyses and choose New From Surveys . The Propagation Model Analysis Survey Selection dialog box opens.
2
Enable the check boxes next to those surveys you want to include in the analysis.
3
Click Generate. The Analysis Results dialog box opens and a new analysis node is created in the Proj ect Explorer. The name of the new an alysis node is analysis_ .
Mentum Planet User Guide 264
Chapter 11
Viewing analysis results The Analysis Results dialog presents information about the analysis based on the thresholds y ou defined in “Definin g analysis settings”. The columns of information can include:
To view analysis results 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Network Analysis category, expand the Propagation Model Analyses node and double-click the analysis you want to view. The Analysis Results dialog box opens.
2
In the tree view of the Analysis Results dialog box, do any of the following: n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
Click the Sectors node to view results related to all the sectors included in the analysis. Expand the Sectors node and choose an individual sector to view results specific to that sector. Expand an individual sec tor node to view information related to clutter classes and distance ranges for that sector. Click the Models node to view results related to all the propagation models included in the analysis. Expand the Models node and choose an individual propagation model to view results specific to that propagation model. Expand an individual propagation model to view information related to clutter classes and distance ranges for that propagation model. Click the Surveys node to view results related to all the surveys included in the analysis. Expand the Surveys node and choose an individual survey to view results specific to that sector. Expand an individual survey node to view information related to clutter classes and distance ranges for that survey.
265 Mentum Planet User Guide
Generating Propagation Model Analyses
n
n
Click the Clutter node to view results related to clutter classes for the entire analysis. Click the Distance node to view results related to distance ranges for the entire analysis.
3
Click the Export All Results to Excel button to save all analysis results to an Excel file.
4
Click the Export Sheet to Excel button to save the current worksheet to an Excel file.
5
Click the Charts button to view pre-designed charts of analysis results information.
TIP: Click a c olumn header to sort information in ascending or descendin g order.
TIP: Double-click a cell in the S ector, Site, Survey, or Model columns to drill down to the details.
To view related sector information You can view other information related to propagation model analysis from the Sites category of the Project Explorer. n
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, right-click the sector node for which you want to view information and choose Surve ys Comp are to Modeled Pre dicti on .
Mentum Planet User Guide 266
Chapter 11
The following tabs display: n
n
n
Survey Vs Distance —a chart of survey versus distance values Histogram —a histogram at the sector level Data —an optional table showing the corresponding survey value and prediction value for ever y survey point in the sector. This table is only available when there is one sector-survey pair (i.e., The Data tab does not display if more than one survey is assigned to the sector.)
n
n
n
Survey Vs Distance —a chart of survey versus distance values Histogram —a histogram at the sector level Data —an optional table showing the corresponding survey value and prediction value for ever y survey point in the sector. This table is only available when there is one sector-survey pair (i.e., The Data tab does not display if more than one survey is assigned to the sector.)
TIP: To view wh at surveys are assign ed to a sector, choose the sector in th e Sites category of the Project Explorer, right-click, and choose Surveys Assigned Surveys.
To view related survey information You can view other information related to propagation model analysis from the Operational Data category of the Project Explorer. n
In the Project Explorer , in the Operational Data category, rightclick the survey for which you want to view information and choose Analy ze Com pare to Modeled Predict ion .
The following tabs display: n
n
n
Survey Vs Distance —a chart of survey versus distance values Histogram —a histogram at the survey level Data —a table showing the corresponding survey value and prediction value for every survey point in the survey
267 Mentum Planet User Guide
Generating Propagation Model Analyses
n
Compare to Modeled Prediction —See “To compare a survey with a modeled prediction”
To view related sector-based propagation model information You can view other information related to propagation model analysis from the Project Data category of the Project Explorer.
1
In the Project Explorer , in the Project Data category, rightclick the propagation model for which you want to view information and chooseAnalyz e From Sec tor . The Propagation Model Analysis Sector Selection dialog box opens.
2
Specify the sectors for which you want to view information by choosing one of the following options in the Sector Selectio n section: n
n
n
All Sectors to view information for all sectors in the project. Current Selection if you have selected specific sectors in the Map window. Flag Filtering if you have defined and assigned flags to sectors. Enable the Invert Conditions check box to select those sectors for which the applied conditions do not apply.
n
n
3
Group Selection if you have defined and created groups. Query Selection if you have defined and created sector queries.
In the Band Filtering section, enable the bands you want to include in your sector selection. The sectors that will be included are displayed in the Selected Sectors list.
4
Click Generate. Results from all sectors that do not use the selected propagation model are filtered out.
Mentum Planet User Guide 268
Chapter 11
The following tabs display: n
n
Survey Vs Distance —a chart of survey versus distance values Histogram —a histogram at the propagation model level
To view related survey-based propagation model information 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Project Data category, right-click the propagation model for which you want to view information and choose Analyz e From Surve y . The Propagation Model Analysis Survey Selection dialog box opens.
2
Enable the check boxes next to th ose surveys for which you want to view information.
3
Click Generate. Results are calculated using only those survey that use the chosen propagation model.
The following tabs display: n
n
n
Survey Vs Distance —a chart of survey versus distance values Histogram —a histogram at the propagation model level Data —a table showing the corresponding survey value and prediction value for every survey point in the chosen surveys.
269 Mentum Planet User Guide
Chapter 12 Managing Traffic A key step in network modeling is estimating how much traffic there is on the network and where the traffic is concentrated. Using this information, you can gage where problem areas exist and plan how to resolve traffic congestion issues; perhaps, by adding a new site or by changing the site configuration. This chapter covers the following topics:
Unde rstandingtrafficmaps
271
Unde rstanding clutter w eighting
274
Workf low fo r creating and editing a traf fic map
277
Cre atingtrafficmaps
278
Cre ating traffic maps from ne tw ork data Viewing matraffic ps
281 282
Adding traffic maps to the Project Explorer Modifyingtrafficmaps
283 284
Converting traffic maps Scaling tra ffim c aps Combiningtrafficmaps Dele ting traffm ic aps
285 286 289 291
Mentum Planet User Guide 270
Chapter 12
Understanding traffic maps Traffic maps provide data about the geographical distribution of subscriber traffic in a network and are key to creating an accurate model of networ k performance. By using well-crafted traffic maps, you ensure that with you r network design, service is available in the areas where it is most needed.
Figure 12.1: An example of a traffi c hot s pot Traffic is spread across the area under consideration based on generated predictions and the traffic density at each bin is calculated using the settings you define.
Using traffic maps In the network plan ning stages, you can use demographic data to estimate subscriber numbers. The variation in subscrib er density across the network coverage area is likely to be similar to the variation in population density. In the network optim ization phase, you can base y our traffic map on networ k data that reflects the actual usage patterns in the network. There are various types of data upon which you can base a traffic map: n
Regions—traffic data for a set of polygon reg ions, such as postal codes
271 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Traffic
n
n
n
Vectors—traffic data for geographical vector objects, such as roads Classified Grid —geographical regions and a text file containing the traffic data for each region. This can be information converted from region and ve ctor data. Network Data —imported traffic data
CAUTION: Longitude/latitude projection is not supported for input data. Reproject the srcinal region or vector table into UTM. If a region is inside another region in the input data, it is discarded. If clutter weightin g is needed, the clutter file and the inpu t table must be in the same projection. n
n
Conversion factors for input traffic data The input traffic data can be measured in subscri bers, Erlangs, or Kilobits per second (Kbps). The Traffic Map Generator output is a numeric grid of traffic density values expr essed as subscriber s, Erlangs, or Kbps per km 2. The conversion factor s between traffic units have default valu es, but you can also specify them with in a range, as described in Table 1. Table 1 Conversion factors for input C onv e rsion
Default F ac tor
Range
Subscribers to Erlangs
0.025
0.000001 to 1.0
Erlangs to Subscribers
40
1to1000000
Subscribers to Kbps
1
0.000001 to 1 000 000
Kbps to Subscribers
1
0.000001 to 1 000 000
Erlangs to kbps
1
0.000001 to 1 000 000
Kbps to Erlangs
1
0.000001 to 1 000 000
When you work with population data, your conversion factor mu st include the conversion from population to s ubscribers, also known as the penetration ra te. For example, if your network has a penetration rate of 10% and you wan t to use a subscribers-to-Erlangs conversion of 0.02 5, the conversion factor when using population data is 0.0025.
Mentum Planet User Guide 272
Chapter 12
Traffic weighting Including traffic in the network model ensures that the analysis outputs more closely mirror the usage patterns in the real-world network. Adding a traffic weighting value to the traffic data inpu t adds further precision to the network analyses. Bins in the traffic map can be weighted using: n
Clutter —use thissubscriber option to take the project clutter file intoclasses. account and better reflect density within specific clutter n
n
n
n
Vector —use this option to take main arteries into account and better reflect subscrib er density along road s, for example. Splice Clutter With Vector —use this option to splice the vector file (such as roads) with the pr oject clutter file. With thi s option, you merge the two grids and in overlapping areas a mathematical calculation is perfor med to determine the new grid value. Null values are ignored. Stamp Vector O n Clutter —use this option to stamp the vector file (such as roads) onto the project clutter fil e. With this option, you combine the two grids and in overlappi ng areas, the value in the vector file overwrites the value in the clutter file. Null values are ignored. None—use this option when you do not want bin traffic weighting applied.
You use the Traffi c Map Generator Wizard to create all traffic maps, but the procedure differs depending on the form of the input. Traffic maps that you create or add to the project are displayed in the Project Explor er, in the Project Data category. The icon beside the traffic map name indicates whether or not you can view properties and edit the traffic map (see Table 2). Table 2 Traffic map icons I c on
Description The traffic map was created within the current project using one of the methods described in this chapter . You can view and edit certain properties. The traffic map was modified or added to the project. You cannot view the properties or edit the traffic map.
273 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Traffic
Understanding clutter weighting Wireless network traffi c is not uniform across a region. There are more subscribers in urban and s uburban areas than in forests and open land. Clutter weighting provides a more realistic view of traffic density. When you apply relative weighting factor s, the Traffic Map Generator red istributes the amount of traffic within each census region according to the underlying clutter types. Figure 12.2 shows a t raffic map c reated from popu lation data without applying clutter weighting. Each census region is marked with a color refl ecting its total population. Red areas are the most populated, blue areas the least. shows the same traffic map after clutter weightin g is applied.
Figure 12.2: Traffic map made from population data by region without clutter weighting
Mentum Planet User Guide 274
Chapter 12
Figure 12.3: weighting
Traffic map made from population data by region with clutter
Clutter weighting redu ces the traffic data value where the underlying clutter type implies few sub scribers, for example, water, open areas, and forest. Values are increased where the underl ying clutter is urban or industrial. Only the distribution of traffic is affected. The total amount of traffic is unchanged. You control clutter weighting by defining a relative weighting value for each c lutter type. The clutter file you use for predictions and analyses is probably not the best one to use for clutter weigh ting. Instead of ground cover types, clutter weighting requires land use information about areas such as shopping centers, stadiums, and highways so that subscriber densities can be determined.
Including vectors in clutter Wireless network traff ic is often concentrated alon g roads. It is useful to include roads on the clutter grid so that they can be assigned clutter classes for clutter weighting. You do this by merging your base clutter file with the v ector file containing the roads or by stamping the vector file onto the clutter grid. During merging, vector objects are converted to bins in the clutter grid file and assigned a clutter class. You can set the width of vector objects on the grid b y setting their buffer radius. If the vector file contains this inf ormation, you can use a separate buffer radius setting for each type of vector object. A vector object, such as a road, added to the clutter g rid, can be assign ed a clutter class that replaces the underlyin g clutter type. Or, you can create a new combin ed clutter type that reflects both the vector type and the und erlying clutter type. For
275 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Traffic
example, you could create new clutter types such as Highway/Ur ban and Highway/Open. You can also stamp vectors into the clutter file in order to account for traffic congestion along roads and highways, for example. With the stamping method, bin values in the vec tor overwrite those in the clutter file in overlapping areas.
Mentum Planet User Guide 276
Chapter 12
Workflow for creating and editing a traffic map Step 1
In the Environment Editor, define the penetration losses. Signals considered in traffi c map generation are attenuated using the defined penetration losses, the frequency band of the sec tor and the clutter class of each bin.
Step 2
Specify the source data for the traffic map (i.e., regions, vectors, a classified grid, or network data).
Step 3
Specify how to apply bin weighting.
Step 4
For network data, specify the traffic-spreading algorithm to use.
Step 5
If required, modify the traffic map properties. You can n
Convert traffic maps. See “Converting traffic maps”.
n
Scale traffic maps. See “Scaling traffic maps” .
n
Combine traffic maps. See “Combining traffic maps” .
277 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Traffic
Creating traffic maps The procedure for creating traffic maps changes depending on the input data you use (i.e., regions, vectors, classified grid, or netw ork data). You can also create a traffic map from a fixed subscriber table.
To create a traffic map 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Project Data category, rightclick Traffic Maps and choose New. The Traffic Map Generating Wizard opens.
2
On the General page, type a nam e in the Name box. The name must contain only alphanumeric characters and no spaces.
3
In the Description box, type a brief description of up to 64 characters.
4
In the Traffic Data Input Format section, choose the traf fic data input source: n
n
n
n
5
Regions—if your traffic data is a .tab file that defines regions where a total traffic count is assigned to each region. Vectors—if your traffic data is a .tab file that contains vectors with the total traffic count assigned to each vector. Classified Grid —if your traffic data is a .grc file where a total traffic count is assigned to clutter classes. Network Data —if your traffic data was collected from wireless network s witching equipment that has been imported into Mentum Planet.
In the Weighting section, choose one of the follo wing options: n
Clutter— to assign a traffic weight to each clutter classes.
n
Vector— to assign a traffic weight to each type of vector.
Mentum Planet User Guide 278
Chapter 12
n
n
n
6
Splice Clutter With Vector— to merge the clutter file and the vector file and assign a traffic weight to a combined clutter class. Stamp Vector On Cl utter— to stamp the vector file onto the clutter grid and assign a traffic weight to the combined clutter class. None—to use a constant weighting value of 1 for all bins.
To account for an indoor\outdoor traffic ratio, enable the Use Indoor \Outdoor Traffic Ratio check box. To take into account the indoor /outdoor traffic ratio, you must add a clutter heights file to the Clutter Heights node within the Geodata node of the Project Explorer or you must add a polygon file to the Polygon folder (where a polygon file is a MapInfo table that contains three columns — Polygon ID, Polygon Type, and AGL. The AGL column is the height above gr ound or sea level for each polygon).
7
In the Unit section, from the Input Data Unit list, choose the units used in the input data.
8
From the Output Data Unit list, choose the units that you want to use in your traffic map.
9
If the units for the input and output data do not match, in the Conversion Factor box, type a conversion factor for input data unit to output data unit, or accept the default. When converting fr om subscribers, the conversion factor should account for both the conversion of units and the conversion of population to subscribers (penetration rate).
10 Click Next and follow the pages of the Wizard. The pages you see depend on the selections you have made. For more information on individual pages of the Wizard, press the F1 key.
To create a traffic map from a fixed subscriber table 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Fixed Subscribers category, rightclick the fixed subscriber table from which you want to create a traffic map and choose Generate Traffic Map .
279 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Traffic
2
In the Traffic Map Generator dialog box, type a name for the new traffic map and click Generate. The new traffic map is added to the Traffic Maps node in the Project Data category of the Project Explorer.
NOTE: When you create a traff ic map from a fixed subscriber table, it is created at the resolution of the Heights grid.
Mentum Planet User Guide 280
Chapter 12
Creating traffic maps from network data When you create traffic maps from network data, you can specify that traffic be spread across the area under c onsideration using: n
n
n
an existing best server coverage grid an on-the-fly best server coverage grid (gener ated automatically as part of the traffic map creation process) sector service pr obabilities
Best server coverage grid When you use a best server coverage grid, a single server is considered at each bin. Before beginning traffic map creation, you must generate a best se rver layer.
On-the-fly best server coverage grid When you have not yet generated a best server coverage grid, choose this option to create one as part of the traffic map creation process.
Sector service probabilities When you use t he single service probab ility algorithm, multiple servers are considered at each bin based on service coverage probabilities.
281 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Traffic
Viewing traffic maps You can view traffic maps in the current Map window. In the Windows category of the Project Explorer, the traffic map layer name is prefixed with “TM_ .”
To view a traffic map n
In the Project Explorer , in the Project Data category, right-click the traffic map and choose View.
Mentum Planet User Guide 282
Chapter 12
Adding traffic maps to the Project Explorer Traffic maps are automatically added to the Project Explorer when you create them. You can also add traffic maps that you did not create in the current project.
To add a traffic map to the Pro ject Explorer 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Project Data category, right-click Traffic Maps and choose Add.
2
In the Add Traffic Map dialog box, navigate to the traffic map that you want to add, and click Open.
283 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Traffic
Modifying traffic maps There are various ways that you can modify and reuse the traffic maps that are generated in Mentum Planet. All of the following oper ations create a new map: n
n
n
n
n
Convert a map to a different traffic unit, changing subscribers/km 2 to Erlangs/km 2, for exa mple. See “To convert a traffic map” . Scale the traffic values by a percentage value. You could do this to adjust for traffic growth, for example. See “To scale a traffic map by percentage” . Scale the traffic values by a positive or negative offset. See “To scale a traffic map by offset” . Scale traffic values by a multiplier depending on the underlying clutter type. You could do this to adjust for traffic growth in certain clutter types, for example. See “To scale a traffic map using clutter scaling factors” . Combine maps, converting traffic units as needed. The maps must use the same coord inate system, but can be based on different types of inpu t data. See “To combine traffic maps”.
Mentum Planet User Guide 284
Chapter 12
Converting traffic maps You can convert a traffic map to a different traffic unit and save it as a new file.
To convert a traffic map 1
In the Project Explorer , right-click on a traffic map and choose Convert . The Convert Traffic Map dialog box opens.
2
In the Converted Traffic Map Name box, type a name for the new traffic map, or accept the default.
3
From the Converted Traffic Map Unit list, choose the traffic unit to which you want to convert.
4
In the Conversion Factor box, type the conversion factor, or accept the default.
5
Click Convert. The converted map is added to the Traffic Maps node in the Project Data category of the Project Explorer . Its properties are not editable.
285 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Traffic
Scaling traffic maps You can change the values in an existing traffic map by scaling them in one of three ways: n
multiply each value by a factor expressed as a percentage
n
add or subtract an offset amou nt to each value
n
multiply each value by a factor depend ent on clutter type
To scale a traffic map by percentage 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Project Data category, rightclick on a traffic map and choose Scale. The Scale Traffic Map dialog box opens.
2
In the Scaled Traffic Map Name box, type a name for the new map, or accept the default.
3
From the Scaling Method list, choose Percentage.
4
In the Scaling Factor box, type the scaling factor. For percentage scaling, the factor must be between 0 and 100 000, inclusive. A value of 100% leaves the map unchanged.
5
Click Scale. The scaled map is added to the Traffic Maps node in the Project Data category of the Project Explorer . Its properties are not e ditable.
To scale a traffic map by offset 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Project Data category, rightclick on a traffic map and choose Scale. The Scale Traffic Map dialog box opens.
2
In the Scaled Traffic Map Name box, type a name for the new map, or accept the default.
3
From the Scaling Method list, choose Offset.
Mentum Planet User Guide 286
Chapter 12
4
In the Scaling Offset box, type the scaling offset. For Offset scaling, the factor must be between - 100 000 and 100 000.
5
Click Scale. The scaled map is added to the Traffic Maps node in the Project Data category of the Project Explorer . Its properties are not editable.
To scale a traffic map using clutter scaling factors 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Project Data categor y, right-click on a traffic map and choose Scale. The Scale Traffic Map dialog box opens.
2
In the Scaled Traffic Map Name box, type a name for the new map, or accept the default.
3
From the Scaling Method list, choose Clutter . By default, the Scaling Clutter File box s hows the name of the clutter file that was used to create the srcinal traffic map. The project clutter file is set as the default weighting clutter filefile. when the srcinal traffic map was created without using a clutter
4
If you want to create a different clutter file, click Browse, navigate to the clutter file that you want to use, and click Open.
5
Do any of the following: n
6
Click Edit—to modify clutter scaling factor s. The Clutter Property Assignment: Clutter Scaling Factor dialog box opens.
n
Click Load—to open an existing Clutter Scaling Factors (.csf) file.
n
Click Save As —to save the clutter scaling factors to a .csf file.
If you chose Edit, in the Clutter Properties Assignment: Clutter Scalin Factor Factor dialog box, click theProperties cell and type a new value to changegScaling values inin the table. Values must be positive and between 0.00 1 and 10 000, inclusive.
287 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Traffic
7
When you have finished modifying values, click Save, and then click Close .
8
Click Scale. The scaled map is added to the Traffic Maps node in the Project Data category of the Project Explorer . Its properties are not e ditable.
Mentum Planet User Guide 288
Chapter 12
Combining traffic maps You can combine traffic maps to prod uce a map of a larger area. The process of combining grids is similar to that of grid splicing , except that traffic c ounts for overlapping areas c an be combined using any of the following methods: n
n
n
n
n
Average—the average traffic value at each bin of all of the traffic maps that have coverage at that bin Average Of Min & Max —the average traffic value between the minimum traffic value and the maximum traffic value at each bin of all of the traffic maps that have coverage at that bin Maximum —the maximum traffic value at each bin of all of the traffic maps that have coverage at that bin Minimum —the minimum traffic value at each bin of all of the traffic maps that have coverage at that bin Sum—the sum traffic value at each bin of all of the traffic maps that have coverage at that bin
The maps that you are combining must have the same coordinate system. Differences in traffic units between the input maps and the new combined map are resolved through conversion. You can specify conversion factors or use the defaults.
To combine traffic maps 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Project Data category, right-click one of the traffic maps that you want to combine and choose Combine. The Combine Traffic Maps dialog box opens.
2
In the Combined Traffic Map Name box, type a name for the new map, or accept the default.
3
From the Combining Method list, choose the method that you want to use to combine the traffic maps.
4
In the Other Compatible Traffic Maps box, enable the check boxes beside the traffic maps that you want to combine.
289 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Traffic
5
From the Combined Traffic Map Unit list, choose the traffic unit that you want to use for the new map.
6
Click Combine.
7
If you are prompted to convert traffic map units, in the Mentum Planet dialog box, click OK. The Assign Conversion Factors dialog box opens.
8
For each map that requires conversion, in the Conversion Factor box, type the conversion factor or accept the default and click Next.
9
When you have finished assigning the conversion factors, click Finish. The new combined traffic map is added to the Traffic Maps node in the Project Data category of the Project Explorer . Its properties are not editable.
NOTE: If you want to combine traf fic maps that all use the same traffic unit, you can use the quick comb ine method. In the Project Explorer, in the Project Data category, choose the traff ic maps that you wa nt to combine. Right-click any of the traffic maps you selected and choose Combine. In the Combine Traffic Maps dialog box, ty pe a name in the Combined Traffic Map Name box, and click OK.
Mentum Planet User Guide 290
Chapter 12
Deleting traffic maps You can remove a traffic map from the Project Explorer and delete the associated traffic map files using the Project Explorer .
To delete a traffic map 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Project Data category, right-click the traffic map that you want to delete and choose Delete .
2
In the confirmation dialog box, click Ye s.
291 Mentum Planet User Guide
Chapter 13 Working With Interference Matrices An interference matrix is an important input to neighbor lists as well as frequency plans and provides early visibility of problem areas. This chapter covers the following topics:
Unde rstanding inte rfe re nce matrices
293
Workflow for creating inte rference matrice s
295
Cre ating inte rfe re nce matrice s
296
Vie wing inte rfe re nce matrices
303
Exporting an inte rfe re nce matrix
306
Deleting interference m atrice s
307
Mentum Planet User Guide 292
Chapter 13
Understanding interference matrices An interference matrix compares sector signal strengths across the network and identifies s ectors that potentially interf ere with each other. Sectors with similar signal strengths produce interference when they are on the same or adjacent channels. An interference matrix is based on a network analysis or traffic map . For all projects, an interference matrix is used for creating neighbor lists. It is also used as an input to other tools such as the Auto matic Frequency, Preamble, and Perm Base Planning tool. The completed interference matrix shows the sources of interference for each sector in a table format.
Figure 13.1: Interference matrix listing the sectors that interfere with Site TO_158, Sector 1
Histogram interference matrices Histogram interference matrices are based on signal s trength predictions (from the propagation model and/or drive test data) and compares C/I values on a bin-by-bin basis using the best server area that is independent of the current serving area. During the histogram generation process, a weighting value is assigned to non-best serving areas. It is important to remember that histogram interference matrices account for C/I only at the ground level and do not account for mob ile use in buildin gs. Further, the
293 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Interference Matrices
histogram generation process approximates subscriber traff ic locations, unless it is based on a traffic map.
Histogram interference algorithms You can use any one of three algorithms to create the interference matrix: n
n
n
Overlapped Best Server Area —generates a C/I histogram where a single server is selected for each location and where the C/I histograms account only for bins where signals between the serving sector and the interfering signal ov erlap. Best Server Area —generates a C/I histogram where a single server is selected for each location and where the C/I histograms account for all the bins served by the serving sector. Sector Service Probabilities —generates a C/I histogram where multiple servers are considered for each location based on service probab ilities. This option is onl y available if all the selected sectors are of the same technology.
Mentum Planet User Guide 294
Chapter 13
Workflow for creating interference matrices Step 1
Create a sector group to use when creating interference matrices. For valid results, each step in the workflow m ust be based on the same sectors. For more information about sector groups, see “Working with sector groups” .
Step 2
Create signal strength predictions for the sector group. See “Generating predictions” . If you want to use a best server grid for your specific technology instead of the best server grid that is generated by the Interference Matrix tool, generate a best se rver analysis. For information on generating analyses, see t he appropriate Use r Guide for the technology you are using.
Step 3
If you want to include traffic information in your interference matrix, create a traffic map. For more information, see “Chapter 8: W orking with Traffic Maps”.
Step 4
Create interference matrix. See “Creating interference matrices” .
Step 5
View the interference matrix. See “ Viewing interference matrices” .
Step 6
Export the interference matrix. See “Exporting an interference matrix” .
295 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Interference Matrices
Creating interference matrices In Mentum Planet, a histogram inter ference matrix is generated on-the-fly based on prediction s. Each interference matrix consists of histograms of C/I. There is one C/I histogram for each server-interferer pair and each histogram represents the distribution of C/I between a server/interferer pair if they were assigned the same carrier. The percentage of co-channel and adjacent-channel interference is based on the C/I histograms and the user-defined co-channel and adjacent-chann el C/I thresholds. A green arrow identifies the ac tive interference matrix, which will be used as an input for other tools (such as the neighbor list generation).
To create a histogram interference matrix 1
In the RF Tools category, right-click the Interference Matrices nod e, chooseNew Downlink .
2
In the Sector Selectio n dialog box, specify the sectors for which you want to create a histogram interference matrix by choosing one of the following options in the Selection Options section: n
n
n
n
n
3
All Sectors to create a histogram interference matrix for all sectors in the project. Current Selection if you have selected specific sectors in the Map window. Flag Filtering if you have defined and assigned flags to sectors. Enable the Invert Conditions check box to select those sectors for which the applied conditions do not apply. Group Selection if you have defined and created groups. Query Selection if you have defined and created sector queries.
In the Band Filtering section, enable the bands you want to include in your sector selection. The sectors that will be included in the histogram interference matrix are displayed in the Selected Sectors list.
Mentum Planet User Guide 296
Chapter 13
4
Click OK. The Generate a Histogram Interference Matrix dialog box opens.
5
In the tree view, expand the Settings node, and define the required settings for each item listed in the tree view: n
Calculation
n
Histogram
n
Conversion
TIP: To update an existing histog ram interference matrix, in the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click an interf erence matrix and choose Update.
TIP: You can also use the Interference Matrix Generator commands accessible from the Optimization menu.
297 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Interference Matrices
Generate a Downlink Histogram Interference Matrix Use the Generate a Downlink Histogram Interference Matrix dialog box to define the settings with which to generate a histogram interference matrix for selected s ites. A histogram interference matrix can be used with the Mentum Planet, the Renaissance AFP tool or other third-party AFP tools. A histogram interf erence matrix is generated on-the-fly based on predictions. Each interference matrix consists of histograms of C/I. There is one C/I histogram for each server-interferer pair and eac h histogram repr esents the distribution of C/I between a server/interferer pair if they were assigned the same carrier. The percentage of co-channel and adjacent-channel interference is based on the C/I histograms and the user-defined co-channel and adjacent-chann el C/I thresholds.
Calculation Name —type in this box a name for the new histogram interference matrix. After you generate a histogram interference matrix, its name is added to the Interference Matrices node in the RF Tools category of the Project Explorer.
Algorithm Overlapped Best Server Area —choose this option to generate a C/I histogram where a single server is selected for each location and where the C/I histograms account only for bins where signals between the serving sector and the interfering signal overlap. Best Server Area —choose this option to generate a C/I histogram where a single server is selected for each location and where the C/I histograms account for all the bins served by the serving sector. Server Service Probabilities —choose this option to generate a C/I histogram where multiple servers are considered for each location based on service probabilities. This option is only available if all the selected se ctors are of the same technology.
Traffic Use this section to choose a traffic map with which to generate a histogram interference matrix. The generated histogram inter ference matrix will include
Mentum Planet User Guide 298
Chapter 13
traffic information from the chosen traffic map. Traffic maps are numeric grids generated using the Traffic Map Generator that c ontain traffic data in the form of Erlangs/km². Use A Traffic Map —enable this check box to generate the histogram interference matrix based on a traffic map. Traffic Map —choose from this list the traffic map with which to generate the histogram interference matrix. This list is only available when the Use a Traffic Map check box is enabled.
RSSI Thresholds Victim RSSI Threshold—type in this box the received signal strength threshold for the victim. Servers with sign al strengths below this v alue are not used to generate the histogram inter ference matrix. RSSI values range from -200 to 0 dBm. Offender RSSI Threshold—type in this box the received signal strength threshold for the offending signal. Interferers with signal strength s below this value are not used to generate the histogram inter ference matrix. RSSI values range from -200 to 0 dBm.
Non Best Server Calculation Use this sec tion to define the settings that affect the serving area of all server s. This section is only applicable to the best server algorithms and is not available for the sector service probablities algorith m. After the interference at each bin is calculated for a se rver, the Include Servers Within and Non-best Server Weighting settings are used to weight the affected traffic and affected area values using the following calculation s: n
n
n
total affected traf fic = affected traf fic when the sector is the Best Server + Non Best Server Weighting *affected traffic when the sector is a Non Best Server total carried traffic = traffic when the sector is the Best Server + Non Best Server Weighting*traffic when the sector is a Non Best Server. % of affected traffi c = total affected traff ic/total carried traf fic
Include Servers Within—type in this box the maximum signal strength that a server can be less than the best server signal and be considered as non-best server.
299 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Interference Matrices
This value must be greater than 0 to affect the generated histogram interference matrix. Non Best Server Weighting —type in this box the percentage of interference that comes from ar eas where a server is a non-best se rver. The range for nonbest server weighting is 0% to 100%.
Sector Service Probability Parameters This section is only applicable to the service probabilities algorithm. Environment—choose from this list the environment within which you want to consider the sector service probabilities. Carrier Type (for cdma2000 only)—choose the carrier type to consider when generating sector service probabilities.
Use HCL (Hierarchical Cell Layer s, GSM Only)—enable this check box to use hierarchical c ell layers to generate the histogram interf erence matrix. Use Timing Advanced Limit (for GSM only)—enable this check box to limit the area considered in the histogram interference matrix to that of the best server coverage region . This option is not available for gen eric projects. Use Best Server Coverage Limit —enable this check box to limit the area considered in the histogram interference matrix to that of the best server coverage region . This option is not available for gener ic projects.
Generate a Downlink Histogram Interference Matrix Use the Generate a Downlink Histogram Interference Matrix dialog box to define the settings with which to generate a histogram interference matrix for selected s ites. A histogram interference matrix can be used with the Mentum Planet, Renaissance AFP tool or other third-p arty AFP tools. A histogram interf erence matrix is generated "on-the-fly" by c alculating C/I and C/A values at each bin across the network and determining the probability of a sector being an inter ferer. In each histogram interference matrix, C/I values are calculated for "strong" interferers and the C/I mean and standard deviation values are calculated for "weak" interfer ers. Which interferers are considered “strong” and which are considered "weak" is determined by the thresholds that you define.
Mentum Planet User Guide 300
Chapter 13
Histogram Histogram Intervals Minimum C/I —type in this box the minimum C/I value stored in the histogram. Maximum C/I —type in this box the maximum C/I value stored in the histogram. Number Of Steps—type in this box the size of the intervals for the histogram.
Histogram Based Interferers Filtering Use Nth Strongest —enable this check box to set the number of strongest interferers for which to save full histograms. Only average and standard deviation values are saved for other inter ferers. In the box to the righ t, type the number of strongest interferers for which to save full histograms. Use Relative Threshold —enable this check box to define the relative threshold used choose the interferers for which to s ave full histogram s. Full histograms are saved for an interferer that has an average C/I value that is lower than the worst interferer C/I value plus the relative threshold . In the box to the righ t, type a value for the relative threshold. Use Absolute Threshold—enable this check box to define the absolute threshold used choose the interferers for which to s ave full histogram s. Full histograms are saved for interferers that have an average C/I value that is lower than the absolute threshold. In the box to the right, type a value for th e absolute threshold.
Generate a Downlink Histogram Interference Matrix Use the Generate a Downlink Histogram Interference Matrix dialog box to define the settings with which to gener ate a histogram interference matrix for selected sites. A histogram interference matrix can be used with the Mentum PlanetRenaissance AFP tool or other third-party AFP tools. A histogram interf erence matrix is generated " on-the-fly" by calculating C/I and C/A values at each bin across the network and determining the probability of a sector being an interferer. In each histogram interference matrix, C/I values are calculated for "strong" interfer ers and the C/I mean and standard deviation values are calculated for "weak" interferer s. Which interferers are considered “strong” and which are considered "weak" is determined by the thresholds that you define.
301 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Interference Matrices
Conversion Affected Traffic Thresholds Use this panel to view the settings taken into account when exporting an interference matrix in order to produce the probabilities of area/traffic interference for co-channel and adjacent channels. Co-channel Threshold—type in this box the signal strength below which cochannel interferers are considered affected traffic. This box is only available when the User Defined Values option is chosen. Adj. Channel Threshold—type in this box the signal strength below which adjacent channel interferers are considered affected traffic. This box is only available when the User Defined Values option is chosen.
Mentum Planet User Guide 302
Chapter 13
Viewing interference matrices You can view the interferer s and their effects for each se ctor in a table format. The interference metrics displayed include: n
Co-channel affected area (km2 )
n
Co-channel affected area (%)
n
n
Adjacent channel aff ected area (km2) Adjacent channel affected area (%)
To view a histogram interference matrix 1
In the RF Tools categor y, expand the Interfer ence Matrices node, right-click the histogram inter ference matrix that you want to view, and choose View. The Histogram Interference Matrix dialog box opens.
2
In the Histogram Interference Matrix dialog box, do any of the following: n
In the Servers tree view, choose a sector and vie w its interf erers in the Interferers table.
303 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Interference Matrices
n
n
n
To view adjacent channel interf erers in a histogram interference matrix, in the Interference Display section, choose the Adjacent Channel option. To view co-channel interf erers in a histogram interference matrix, in the Interference Display section, choose th e C oChannel option. To view the Interferer Histogram curve of an interfering secto r, click Browse in the Display Curve column. The Curve Editor dialog is displayed. For more information about the Curve Editor, press the F1 key.
To view histogram interference matrix settings 1
In the RF Tools categor y, expand the Interfer ence Matrices node.
2
Expand the Modeled node and choose a histogram interference matrix.
3
Right-click and choose View Settings.
Mentum Planet User Guide 304
Chapter 13
The Histogram Interference Matrix dialog box opens where you can view the setting used in the generation of the interference matrix as well as details about the creation of the matrix.
4
When you have finished reviewing the details, click Close .
305 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Interference Matrices
Exporting an interference matrix You can export an interference matrix in order to examine how interference is affecting your network. By default, the interference matrix is e xported to a .txt file.
To export an interference matrix n
In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, rightclick the interferen ce matrix that you want to export, and choose Export.
Mentum Planet User Guide 306
Chapter 13
Deleting interference matrices You can delete interference matrices from the Project Explorer.
To delete interference matrices 1
In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, choose th e interference matrices that you want to delete.
2
Right-click and choose Delete and, in the Confirmation dialog box, click Ye s.
307 Mentum Planet User Guide
Chapter 14 Managing Neighbor Relation ships In order to design a wireless network where users can move between sectors smoothly with no inter ruption of service, you need to understan d how sites influence each other and ho w they can better interact with each other. To do this, you create a neighbor plan that encompasses sector neighbor lists and using this information, you can determine the best handover strategy for the network and make appropriate decisions about network design. This chapter covers the following topics:
Unde rstanding ne ighbor planning
309
Workf low fo r planning neighbor relationships
311
Choosing the type of ne ighbor plan
312
Cre atingne ighborplans
314
Mentum Planet User Guide 308
Chapter 14
Understanding neighbor planning Each sector in a wireless network coordinates with its neighbors to maintain good quality coverage to mobile users. As a mobile user reaches the mar gins of coverage within a sect or, stronger signals become availab le from other sectors. Through a process called hand over, the network re-routes the user’s call to one of the neighbor sectors to maintain the connection.
Figure 14.1: Neighbors displayed in the Map window There is a wide variety of criteria that can be used to identify neighbors and nonneighbors. Mentum Planet includes a flexible neighbor plan creation process that ensures the neighbor plan you are working with is the one best suited for your network e nvironment. You can create neighbor plans for one technology or for multiple technologies and you can focus plans on specific environments (either indoor or outdoor). As part of the neighbor planning process, predictions are generated and the overlap of signals between sectors determines neighbor candid acy.
309 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Neighbor Relationships
Figure 14.2: Because the serving ar eas overlap signi ficantly, these sites are considered to be neighbors The fundamental elements of the neighbor planning process are: n
n
n
Neighbor Lists, which are defined at the sector level and define which sectors are neighbors. Black Lists , which are defined at the sector level and contain the list of neighboring sectors that are not available and will not be considered as part of the neighbor planning process. Neighbor Plans , which are defined at the network level and encompass the neighbor lists for the sectors selected. A neighbor plan is a database of each sector's nearby sites and sectors along with the sites and sectors that are black-listed.
Mentum Planet User Guide 310
Chapter 14
Workflow for planning neighbor relationships Step 1
Create a sector group or choose an existing sector group. For valid results, each step in the workf low must be based on the same sectors.
Step 2
In the network settings, define the base station type and associated neighbor planning criteria such as the maximum number of neighbors permitted, the handover type and the boundar y for the base station type.
Step 3
In the Site Editor, at the sector level, define a black list th at identifies neighbors that are not available. To quickly define black lists, you can export Neighbor and Black Lists, update the lists, and re-import the data.
Step 4
If you are creating a neighbor plan based on the best server, generate a best server coverage layer.
Step 5
If you are creating a neighbor plan based on interference, generate an interference matrix.
Step 6
Create a neighbor plan using the Neighbor Plan Generator Wizard to define: n
n
the sectors to in clude the type of neighbor plan to create
n
the algorithm
n
the frequencies and carrier s to include
Step 7
Optimize the neighbor plan.
Step 8
If required: n
Compare a neighbor plan with another one.
n
View the details of the neighbor p lan in the tabular ed itor.
n
View neighbor relationships in the Map window using the Carrier and Code Display available from th e Optimization men u. Each type of neighbor relationship is displayed with a unique color.
Step 9 Once you have determin ed the best plan, apply it to sec tors.
311 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Neighbor Relationships
Choosing the type of neighbor plan For each combination of technologies (e.g., GSM to WCDMA, LTE to 1xRTT, WiMAX, etc.), there is a variety of neighbor plan typ es: n
n
n
n
Intra-RAT—accounting for neighbors using the same radio access technology. Inter-RAT—accounting for neighbors using different radio access technologies. Intra-Carrier—accounting for neighbors using the same technology and carrier. Inter-Carrier—accounting for neighbors using the same technology but different carriers.
And, for each neighbor plan type there is a choice of neighbor plan algorith m: n
the best server alg orithm
n
the interference matrix algorithm
n
the service probab ilities algorithm
Best Server algorithm The Best Server algorithm uses a best serving sector classified grid to examine the best server coverage area (i.e., the area where the signal is strongest) of each sec tor. You must generate a best server layer before begin ning neighbor planning. Neighbors are sectors with adjacent best server coverage areas. However, this definition could result in a large number of neighbors. Therefore, you can set minimum length requirements for the common border between coverage areas to reduce the num ber of sectors that quali fy as neighbors. With the Best Server method, the priority of neighbors is determined based on the area between a server and a neighbor.
Mentum Planet User Guide 312
Chapter 14
Interference Matrix algorithm Creating a neighbor list from an interference matrix is a more sophisticated technique than the Best Server method. An interference matrix calculates the effect of sectors upon each other, both as interferers and as potential n eighbors. An interference matrix can be based on any or all of the following: n
n
a best server sector classified g rid a traffic map
You must generate an interference matrix before beginning neighbor planning.
Service Probabilities algorithm The service probability algorithm is based on predictions generated in Mentum Planet. It ensures that cells with overlapping coverage areas are defined as neighbors. Service probabilities and handover prob abilities are c alculated in order to define which cells are neighbors.
313 Mentum Planet User Guide
Managing Neighbor Relationships
Creating neighbor plans You can create a neighbor plan for single-technolog y or multi-technol ogy networks. The Neighbor Plan Generator Wizar d steps you through the process of creating a neighbor plan. NOTE: The more detailed the neigh bor requirements, the better suited the neighbor planningplan results be to neighbors your network To help you analyze neighbor ningwill results, are environment. prioritized based on carried traffic or coverage area.
To create a neighbor plan 1
In the Project Explorer , in the RF Tools category, right-click Neighbor Plans and choose New .
2
In the Neighbor Plan Generator Wizard , type a name for the neighbor plan and, option ally, a desc ription.
3
In the Sector Selection section, choose one of the follow ing options: n
n
n
n
n
4
5
All to include all sites in the neighbor plan. Current Selection if you have selected specific sectors in the Map window. Flag Filtering if you have defined and assigned flags to sectors. Enable the Invert Conditions check box to select those sectors for which the applied conditions do not apply. Group Selection if you have defined and created groups. Query Selection if you have defined and created sector queries.
In the Band Filtering section, enable the check box next to those bands you want to include in your sector selection. Click Next and follow the pages of the Wizard.
Mentum Planet User Guide 314
Neighbor Plan Generator Wizard Name, Description And Sectors
Neighbor Plan Generator Wizard Use the Neighbor Plan Generator Wizard to create a new neighbor plan to better understand how neighbor ing sec tors interact.
Name, description, and Sectors Name —type in this box a name for the neighbor plan. Description—type in this box additional info rmation about the neighbor plan.
Sector Selection Selection Options All—choose this option to include all sectors in the generatio n process. The number of sites and sectors is displayed in paren theses. The label changes to reflect the technolog y of valid sectors from whi ch you can select. For example, if you are using the Automatic Frequency Planning tool, only TDMA sectors are valid. In this case, the label reads All TDMA Sectors. Current Selection—choose this option to select those sectors currently selected in the Map window. Flag Filtering—choose this option to include those sites identified with the flag and condition enabled in the Project Explorer . Invert Conditions—enable this check box to include those sites that are not part of the flag filter selected in the Project Explorer. Group Selection—choose this option to select those sectors that are part of the specified group. Query Selection—choose this option to select sectors based on the specified query.
Band Filtering Use the Band Filtering section to choose the bands upon which you want to create a Only subset of sites. Enable theincheck box nextSetting to the sbands include. those bands defined the Network Editoryou arewant to displayed.
Mentum Planet User Guide 316
Add New Neighbor
Neighbor Plan Generator Wizard Use the Neighbor Plan Generator Wizard to create a new neighbor list to better understand how neighboring sectors interact.
Neighbor Plan Type and Algorithm Neighbor Plan Type Enable the check box next to those neighbor plan types you want to create.
Algorithm Best Server —choose this algorithm to use a best serving sector classified grid to examine the best server coverage area (i.e., the area where the signal is strongest) of each sector. Interference Matrix—choose this algorithm to use an interference matrix in the neighbor planning process. An interference matrix calculates the effect of sectors upon each other, both as interferers and as potential neighb ors and can be based on any or all of the following: n
a best server sector classified g rid
n
a traffic map
Service Probabilities—choose this algorithm to base the neighbor plan on a calculated coverage probability.
Mentum Planet User Guide 317
Neighbor List Generator Wizard Algorithm Parame ters
Neighbor Plan Generator Wizard Use the Neighbor Plan Generator Wizard to create a new neighbor list to better understand how neighboring sectors interact.
Algorithm Parameters Best Serving Sector Layer —choose from this list the best serving sector layer you want to use to determine neighbor relationships. Use Absolute Border Length Threshold—enable this check box to define the minimum border length between the coverage area of two sectors to consider them as neighbors. In the box to the right, type the absolute bor der length. This box is only av ailable when the Us e Absolute Border Length Threshold check box is enabled. Use Relative Border Length Threshold —enable this check box to define the minimum common border leng th relative to the total border length of the reference sec tor that is required to consider th e sec tors as neighbors. In the box to the right, type a percentage to def ine the relative border length. This box is only available when the Use Relative Border Length Threshold check box is enabled.
NOTE: When both the Use Absolute Border Length Threshold and Use Relative Border Length Threshold check boxes are e nabled, sectors must meet both conditions to be considered neighb ors.
Mentum Planet User Guide 318
Neighbor List Generator Wizard Threshold Parameters
Neighbor Plan Generator Wizard Use the Neighbor Plan Generator Wizard to create a new neighbor list to better understand how neighboring sectors interact.
Threshold Parameters
NOTE: Parameters with a value of zero are ignored in the neighbor planning process.
Use Absolute Area —enable this check box to define the minimum interfering area between two sectors. Neighbors are ranked by overlappin g coverage area and included, in descending ord er, until the maximum number of neighbors is reached. Use Relative Area —enable this check box to use the relative area (as a percentage) when ranking neighbors and type a percentage in the associated box. Neighbors are ranked by the size of the overlapping coverage area relative to the value defined. Use Absolute Traffic —enable this check box to define the minimum level of traffic between two sectors. Neighbors are ranked by traffi c in the overlapping coverage area and included , in descending or der, until the maximum number of neighbors is reached. Use Relative Traffic —enable this check box to define the minimum percentage of traffic between two sectors. Neighbors are ranked by the traffi c in the overlapping coverage area relative to this sector’s traffic and included, in descending order , until the maximum num ber of neighbors is reached.
Mentum Planet User Guide 319
Chapter 14
Determine Priority Using —choose from this list one of the following options: n
n
Area—choose this option to prioritize neighbors based on the area handed ove r from sector to neighbor. Traffic —choose this option to prioritize neighbors based on amount of traffic handed over from sec tor to neighbor.
n
Area—choose thissector optionto to neighbor. prioritize neighbors based on the area handed ove r from n
Traffic —choose this option to prioritize neighbors based on amount of traffic handed over from sec tor to neighbor.
320 Mentum Planet User Guide
Neighbor List Generator Wizard Threshold Parameters
Adding neighbor plans to the Project Explorer Neighbor plans are automatically added to the Project Explorer when you create them. However, you can also add an existin g neighbor plan to your project.
To add a neighbor plan to the Project Explorer 1
In the Project Explorer , in the RF Tools category, right-click Neighbor Plans and choose Add.
2
Navigate to the neighbor plan you want to add, and click Open. The neighbor plan is added to the Neighbor Plans node in the Project Explorer and saved in the NeighborList folder within the project.
Mentum Planet User Guide 321
Chapter 14
Viewing neighbor relationships You can view details about neighbor relationships in the tabular editor or you can view neighbor relation ships for any sector graphically in a Map window.
Figure 14.1: Neighbor display. The color of the line indicates the type of neighbor (i.e., inter-RAT or intra-RAT).
To view neighbor relationships in the Tabular Editor 1
In the Project Explorer , in the RF Tools categor y, right-click a neighbor plan and choose View.
2
Using the buttons on the tool strip, you can: n
change how the data is displ ayed
n
view data graphically as a point, line, or column
322 Mentum Planet User Guide
Neighbor List Generator Wizard Threshold Parameters
n
generate statistics
NOTE: If you have already exported the neighbor plan to Excel, you can view details of the plan by right-clicking and choosing Open File in Excel.
To view neighbor relationships 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites category, double-click the sector for which you want to view neighbors or sites that are on the black list.
2
In the Site Editor , in the tree view, choose the sector.
3
Click the Neighbor List tab.
4
On the Neighbor tab, define the display criteria to filter the number of candidate neighbors listed.
5
Click Add to add neighbors to the sector.
6
Specify those sectors you wan t to consider as neighbors and then click Add.
7
To view the neighbor relationships, click View In Map . The neighbor list information is displayed in the active Map window.
NOTE: You can also view neighbor relationships using the Carr ier and Code display dialog box accessible from the Optimization menu.
Mentum Planet User Guide 323
Chapter 14
Comparing neighbor plans The Neighbor Plan Gener ator can produce se veral neighbor plans for the s ame sectors using diff erent settings. You can compare any two of these plans in the Data Comparison dialog box and, from there, export data to Excel or to .csv files for further analysis.
To compare neighbor plans 1
In the Project Explorer , in the RF Tools category, choose th e neighbor plans that you want to compare.
2
Right-click and choose Compare. The Data Comparison dialog box opens.
3
To filter the data in the neighbor plan comparison, from the Filtering list, choose which data you would like displayed.
324 Mentum Planet User Guide
Neighbor List Generator Wizard Threshold Parameters
4
Use the buttons on the toolbar to sort data, display graphs, or generate statistics.
5
When you have finished examining the data, click Close .
Mentum Planet User Guide 325
Chapter 14
Optimizing neighbor plans You can optimize neighbor plans and apply results to the neighbor lists for the selected sectors.
To optimize the current neighbor plan 1
In the Project Explorer , in the RF Tools category, right-click the Neighbor Plans node and choose Optimize.
2
In the Neighbor P lan Optimization Wizard , specify the sectors you want to optimize by choosing any of the following: n
n
n
n
n
3
All to include all sites in the neighbor plan. Current Selection if you have selected specific sectors in the Map window. Flag Filtering if you have defined and assigned flags to sectors. Enable the Invert Conditions check box to select those sectors for which the applied conditions do not apply. Group Selection if you have defined and created groups. Query Selection if you have defined and created sector queries.
In the Band Filtering section, enable the check box next to those bands you want to include in your sector selection.
4
Click Next.
5
Specify the sectors you want to consider by choosing any of the following: n
n
n
All to include all sites in the neighbor plan. Current Selection if you have selected specific sectors in the Map window. Flag Filtering if you have defined and assigned flags to sectors. Enable the Invert Conditions check box to select those sectors for which the applied conditions do not apply.
n
Group Selection if you have defined and created groups.
326 Mentum Planet User Guide
Neighbor List Generator Wizard Threshold Parameters
n
6
Query Selection if you have defined and created sector queries.
In the Band Filtering section, enable the check box next to those bands you want to include in your sector selection. The number of sectors to consider should be greater than the number of sectors to optimize.
7
Click Next and follow the pages of the Wizard to define the optimization criteria.
To optimize neighbor plans 1
In the Project Explorer , in the RF Tools category, right-click the neighbor plan you want to optimize and choose Optimize.
2
In the Neighbor List Optimization Wizard, choose one of the following options: n
n
n
n
n
All to include all sites in the neighbor plan. Current Selection if you have selected specific sectors in the Map window. Flag Filtering if you have defined and assigned flags to sectors. Enable the Invert Conditions check box to select those sectors for which the applied conditions do not apply. Group Selection if you have defined and created groups. Query Selection if you have defined and created sector queries.
3
In the Band Filtering section, enable the check box next to those bands you want to include in your sector selection.
4
Click Next and follow the pages of the Wizard to define the optimization criteria.
Mentum Planet User Guide 327
Chapter 14
Applying neighbor plans When you apply a neighbor plan, you have the choice to merge or replace the currently as signed one. When you: n
n
merge two neighbor plans, those neighbors that exist in the new plan but are not in the currently assigned plan are added. replace the currentl y as signed plan with the new plan, all neighbor relationships are replaced.
To merge neighbor plans 1
In the Project Explorer , in the RF Tools category, choose th e neighbor plan that you want to merge with the currently assigned one.
2
Right-click and choose Apply
Merge .
Missing neighbors are added to the neighbor lists associated with sectors in the plan.
To replace neighbor plans 1
In the Project Explorer , in the RF Tools category, choose th e neighbor plan that will replace the currently as signed one.
2
Right-click and choose Apply
Replace .
All neighbors are added to the neighbor lists associated with sectors in the plan.
328 Mentum Planet User Guide
Neighbor List Generator Wizard Threshold Parameters
Deleting neighbor plans You can delete neighbor plan s using the Project Explorer.
To delete a neighbor plan 1
In the Project Explorer , in the RF Tools category, choose one or more neighbor plans, right-click and choose Delete .
2
In the Mentum Planet dialog box, click Ye s.
Mentum Planet User Guide 329
Chapter 15 Optimizing Network De sign You can optimize network design using the Automatic Cell Planning (ACP) features of Mentum Planet in order to extend coverage and increase capacity by fine tuning antenna parameters and by activating only those sites that best fit the network design and goals.
NOTE: Only LTE FDD, LTE TDD, cdma2000, and EV-DO are supported in this release. This chapter covers the following topics:
Unde rstanding ne tw ork optimiz ation
331
Be foreyoube gin
334
Workflow for network optimiz ation
335
Understanding optimiza tion in Mentum Planet
336
Mentum Planet User Guide 330
Chapter 15
Understanding network optimization More and more people are embracing wirel ess technologies and incorporating them into their day-to-day lives using applications that requir e greater bandwidth. As a result, efficiently designing a network with optim al capacity and the greatest possible coverage while still maintaining a high quality c ommunication grid is the ultimate goal. You must fulfill this goal by effectively balancing network coverage, capacity, quality, and cost.
Figure 15.1: Balancing Coverage/Capacity/Q uality in network optimization.
331 Mentum Planet User Guide
Optimizing Network Design
Better network design Using the Mentum Planet Automatic Cell Planning (ACP) tool to fine tune the network design, you can significan tly improve the overall quality of the network by: n
Optimizing network performance
n
Resolving network issues such as coverage gaps or h oles
n
Delivering higher received signal strength levels
n
Improving system quality
n
Providing higher capacity
Figure 15.2: Improving the quality of the network design The ACP tool performs two key functions. n
Provides you with a list of potential chan ges to antenna parameters ( e.g., mechanical azimuth and tilt, electrical azimuth, tilt, and beamwidth)
n
Proposes th ose sites, from a list of candidate sites, that should be activated and those that should be deactivated.
Mentum Planet User Guide 332
Chapter 15
Lower cost Automatic Cell Planning reports detail potential improvements to the network t hat can involve: n
changing the antenna model used
n
modifying individual antenna parameters
n
fine tuning power and repeater gains
n
activating or deactivating sites
Some of these improvements can be implemented remotely in a cost-effective manner. For example, you can: n
optimize the electrical tilt to increase the coverage area
n
increase the pilot pow er to cover a larger coverage area
n
change the electrical azimuth to deal with inter ference
n
use an antenna pattern tha t is more suited to network requirements
NOTE: The ACP tool supports shared antennas.
333 Mentum Planet User Guide
Optimizing Network Design
Before you begin Initial planning is important before using Mentum Planet to optimize your network. n
n
n
n
Analyzing the network—gain an understanding of where problem areas are located and which sites are impacted. Determin ing your netw ork strategy —determine whether you want to consider changes to site parameters only or if you want to only activate or deactivate sites. You might want to do both. Establish ing the objectives of network optimization — decide which goal s you want to include in the optim ization. For example, do you want to consider both th e uplink coverage and the capacity of the network in the optimization and, if so, do you want goals to have the same impact on the results. Settle on network performance targets that are in line with your overall objectives and decide the cost you are willing to assume. Defining the optimization area and the sectors to consider—specify the areas you want to optimize as well as the list of sectors repeaters to be accounted during optimization. Youand need to carefully choose thosefor sites to the consider because too large a selection will result in a longer computation time while too few may produce inaccurate results. If required, create area grids to delineate the di fferent areas to include in the optimization.
After the preparatory work is complete, follow the recomm ended workflow to optimize your network.
Mentum Planet User Guide 334
Chapter 15
Workflow for network optimization Step 1
In the Environment Editor, if required, define the penetration losses to be considered in the network optimization.
Step 2
In the Site Editor, for the antennas being used, define the optimization constraints.
Step 3
In the Optimization of the Project Explorer, create optimization profile.category You can create more than one prof ile toan address different situations.
Step 4
Define the goals and constr aints to which you w ant network optimization to adhere.
Step 5
If required, create one or several combined goals to merge goals based on the weight assigned to each one.
Step 6
Define optimization settings including the optimization type, the sector and repeater selection and, if you have chosen the site selection mode, the activation mode and criteria.
Step 7
Create an optimization scenario.
Step 8
If you have site selectio selecti on, view the site selection report and , if accepta ble,chosen apply site n changes.
Step 9
If you have chosen site op timization, view the optimization report and, if acceptable, apply optimization changes.
335 Mentum Planet User Guide
Optimizing Network Design
Understanding optimization in Mentum Planet The Project Explorer in Mentum Planet provides easy access to core functionality, grouping network design and optimization features in easy-touse cate gories. Network optimization functionality is c ontained within the Optimization category.
NOTE: There are two the ACP available: Cluster_ ACP and ACP. Using the Cluster_ ACP versions version, of you can optimize a maximum of 100 sectors. The ACP version ex tends this limit. For more information, visit mentum.com.
Figure 15.3: Optimization category of the Project Explorer The network optimization process encompasses the following key elements in Mentum Planet: n
n
Optimization constraints —define the criteria used to optimize the antenna configuration. You define c onstraints on the Optimization Constraints tab in the Site Editor for each antenna. Optimization goals —define the criteria used to evaluate the quality of the network as well as the constraints that must be respected.
n
Optimization profiles—contain the optimization goals and include multiple goals as well as combined goals.
Mentum Planet User Guide 336
Chapter 15
n
n
Optimization settings —include the optimizatio n type, sector and repeater selection, and site selection mod e (i.e., site activation/deactivation ). Defining optimization setting s is the first step in creating an optimization. Optimization scenarios—define the optimization areas and environment, equipment type, and traffic. Using optimization scenarios, you can optimize different areas of the network or you can te st results for differ ent optimization goals , different traffic conditions, or different environments. Creating a scenario is the second step in creating an optimization.
Using optimization goals Optimization goals aim to define networ k c overage and capacity targets. For each technology, there is an associat ed list of goals. For each goal, th ere is a defined weight that indicates the importance of the goal in the network optimization process. You can further refine optimization goals by using bin weighting thr ough the use of a traffic map or customized grid. NOTE: Optimization goals take into account the penetration l osses that are defined in the Environment Editor.
cdma2000 and 1xRTT Pilot Ec Coverage —the goal is to maximize the area or traffic with all bins in the optimization area exceeding the pilot Ec threshold . To evenly distribute the coverage across all sec tors in the networ k, enable the Balan ce Footprints check box and define a weight where a 0 results in the balance footprint option not impacting the optimization and a weight of 1 signifies that the balance footprint option will have the same impact as the Pilot Ec Coverage goal. Pilot Ec/Io Coverage —the goal is to maximize the area or traffic with all bins in the optimization area exceeding the pilot Ec/Io threshold. Capacity —the goal is for sectors to have loads as close as possible to the userdefined target cell load. Uplink Coverage—the goal is to maximize the area or traffic with all bins in the optimization area exceeding the uplink s ignal strength thresho ld.
337 Mentum Planet User Guide
Optimizing Network Design
Pilot Ec Coverage Limit —the goal is to minimize the area or traffic with all bins in the optimization area exceeding the pilot Ec threshold. First Minus Nth Signal —the goal is to maximize the area or traffic in the optimization area for which the difference between the first pilot Ec and the Nth pilot Ec exceeds the first minus signal strength threshold.
cdma2000 and EV-DO Pilot Ec Coverage —the goal is to maximize the area or traffic with all bins in the optimizatio n area excee ding the pilot Ec threshold. To evenly distribute the coverage across all sec tors in the networ k, enable the Balan ce Footprints check box and define a weight where a 0 results in the balance footprint option not impacting the optimization and a weight of 1 signifies that the balance footprint option will have the same impact as the Pilot Ec Coverage goal. Pilot Ec/Io Coverage —the goal is to maximize the area or traffic with all bins in the optimization area exceeding the pilot Ec/Io threshold. Capacity —the goal is for sectors to have loads as close as possible to the user-defined target cell load. Uplink Coverage —the goal is to maximize the area or traffic with all bins in the optimization area ex ceeding the uplink s ignal s trength threshold. Limit Coverage —the goal is to minimize the area or traffic in the optimization area for which the pilot Ec exceeds the pilot Ec threshold. First Minus Nth Signal —the goal is to maximize the area or traffic in the optimization area for which the difference between the first pilot Ec and the Nth pilot Ec exceeds the first minus signal strength threshold.
LTE FDD and LTE TDD RSRP Coverage—the goal is to maximize the area or traffic with all bins in the optimization area exceeding the RSRP threshold. RSRQ Coverage—the goal is to maximize the area or traffic with all bins in the optimization area ex ceeding the RSRQ threshold. Reference C/(N+I) Coverage —the goal is to maximize the area or traffic with all bins in the optimization area exceeding the Reference C/(N+I) threshold.
Mentum Planet User Guide 338
Chapter 15
Downlink C/(N+I) Coverage—the goal is to maximize the area or traffic with all bins in the optimization area e xceeding the Downlink C/(N+I) threshold. Spectral Efficiency —the goal is to optimize the spectral efficiency that can be achieved. By using a traffic map to optimize the spectral efficiency in areas with a lot of traffic, you can improve the overall network capacity. Capacity —the goal is for sectors to have loads as close as possible to the userdefined target cell load. Uplink Coverage—the goal is to maximize the area or traffic with all sectors in the optimization area exceeding the uplink s ignal strength thresho ld. Limit Coverage —the goal is to minimize the area or traffic in the optimization area for which the RSRP exceeds the RSRP threshold.
339 Mentum Planet User Guide
Optimizing Network Design
Understanding site selection Network optimization encompasses two phases: n
n
site selection , where sites are activat ed or deact ivated in order to achieve the defined goals site optimization , where antenna parameters are optimized to achieve the defined goals
Site selection is the first of those phases and can be a long and tedious task depending on the number of sites involved. Using the Mentum Plan et optimization features facilitate this wor k. Once you have specified the sites to consider and the sites to optimize, Mentum Planet:
1
Generates predictions for the sites to consider.
2
Determines site status: n
n
3
For site activation, activates a numb er of sites that w ere not initially active in order to improve the network quality. For site deactivation, deactivates a nu mber of active sites while minimizing the network quality degradation.
Assigns an activation/deactivation flag as defined in the optimization settings.
Mentum Planet User Guide 340
Chapter 15
Optimizing the network Easy-to-use Wizards take you through each step of the optimization configuration. Once complete, the progress of the network optim ization is displayed an d you can choose to stop the optimization at any time.
Figure 15.4: Example of optimization progress graphs NOTE: To preserve disk space, you should periodically delete the optimization caches (i.e., delete the pathloss structure used by all existing optim izations). To do this, right-click the Optimizations node and choose Delete All Optimization Caches. To delete optimizatio n caches automatically once an optimi zation is complete, in the User Preferences dialog box, on th e Miscellaneous panel, clear the Retain Optimization Cache check box.
To create an optimization profile 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Optimization category, right-click Optimization Profiles and choose New.
2
In the Optimization Profile Editor, in the tree view, right-click Goals and choose the technology.
3
On the associated panel, define the required parameters.
341 Mentum Planet User Guide
Optimizing Network Design
Press F1 for additional information on available parameters.
4
Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to add additional goals.
5
To create a combined goal and associated weig hting value, in the tree view , choose the top -level Goals node.
6
On the associated panel, Ctrl+click to select th e goals you want to combine and then do one of the following: n
Click the Add Combined Goal button on the tool strip
n
Right-click and choose Combine
The combined goal is added to the tree view.
7
Expand the Combined Goal node and choose the newly created combined goal.
8
On the associated panel, assign a weight to the combined goal and specify the logical operator to use when linking the goals. A weight of zero means the goal won't have an impact on the optimization results.
9
If required, group goals (e.g., group RSRP and RSRQ). A red bracket identifies those goals that are grouped.
10
Click OK.
To optimize the network 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Optimization category, rightclick Optimizations and choose New.
2
Follow the pages of the Optimization Settings Wizard and define required parameters.
3
Press F1 for additional information on available parameters. On the Final Step page, choose one of the followin g options:
Mentum Planet User Guide 342
Chapter 15
n
n
Save Optimization Settings—to save optimization settings and close the W izard. The optimization is added to the Proj ect Explorer. To create a scenario, right-click and choose Cr eate Scenario. Save Settings And Op en Scenari o W izard —to save the optimization settings and create a scenario.
4
Click Finish.
5
If you chose to create a scenario, in the Scenario Wizard , type a descriptive name for the scenario, and click Next.
6
Follow the pages of the Wizard to define the scenario and then click Finish.
343 Mentum Planet User Guide
Optimizing Network Design
Creating optimization profiles Easy-to-use Wizards take you through the process of optimizing the network. This section contains examples of how you can use optimization goals. EXAMPLE: You could create two LTE goals: RSRP Coverage and RSR Q Coverage. You could then comb ine these goals in order to optimize your network.
To create an optimization profile for LTE goals 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Optimization category, rightclick Optimization Profiles and choose New.
2
In the Optimization Profile Editor, in the tree view, right-click Goals and choose Add LTE FDD Goal .
3
On the associated panel, define the required parameters as shown below.
Mentum Planet User Guide 344
Chapter 15
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add another goal for RSRQ Coverage.
5
To create a combined goal and associated weig hting value, in the tree view, choose th e top-level Goals node.
345 Mentum Planet User Guide
Optimizing Network Design
6
On the associat ed panel, ctrl+click to select t he two goals you defined, then right-click and choose Combine. The combined goal is added to the tree view.
7
Expand the Combined Goal node and choose the newly created combined goal.
EXAMPLE: You could create two goals for different technologi es: RSRP and Pilot Ec and then use them to optimize your network.
Mentum Planet User Guide 346
Chapter 15
To create an optimization profile with goals for disparate technologies 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Optimization category, right-click Optimization Profiles and choose New.
2
In the Optimization Profile Editor, in the tree view, right-click Goals and choose Add LTE Goal .
3
On the associated panel, define the required parameters as shown below.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add a cdma2000 goal for Pilot Ec Coverage as shown below.
347 Mentum Planet User Guide
Optimizing Network Design
EXAMPLE: You could create two cdma2000 goals: Pilot Ec and Pilot Ec/Io. You could then combine these two goals in order to optimize your network.
To create an optimization profile for cdma2000 goals 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Optimization category, rightclick Optimization Profiles and choose New.
2
In the Optimization Profile Editor, in the tree view, right-click Goals and choose Add Cdma2000 - 1xRTT Goal .
3
On the associated panel, define the required parameters as shown below.
Mentum Planet User Guide 348
Chapter 15
4
Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to add a goal for Pilot Ec/Io Coverage and define parameters as shown below.
349 Mentum Planet User Guide
Optimizing Network Design
5
To create a combined goal and associated weig hting value, in the tree view , choose the top -level Goals node.
6
On the associat ed panel, Ctrl+click to sel ect the t wo goals you defined and then right-click and choose Combine. The combined goal is added to the tree view.
7
Expand the Combined Goal node and choose the newly created combined goal.
Mentum Planet User Guide 350
Chapter 15
8
On the associated panel, assign a weight of 1 to the combined goal. A weight of zero means the goal won't have an impact on the optimization results.
9
Click OK.
351 Mentum Planet User Guide
Optimizing Network Design
Viewing site selection and optimization results Mentum Planet includes several pre-defined repor ts that provide detailed information on the site selection and network optimization process.
To view site selection results 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Optimization category, rightclick a scenario and choose Display Site Selection Report , and then choose one of the following options: n
n
n
2
Goals—to view the percentage of improvement against the initial configuration at each step in the optimization process. Step 0 is the initial c onfiguration. Configuration—to view the complete network configuration after a specific step of the site selection. Configuration Changes— to view the current and optimized status of antenna parameter s.
When you have finished viewing results, click Close .
To view optimization results 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Optimization category, rightclick a scenario and choose Display Optimization Report, and then choose one of the following: n
n
n
2
Goals—to view the percentage of improvement against the initial configuration at each step in the optimization process. Step 0 is the initial c onfiguration. Configuration— to view the complete network configuration after a specific step in the optimization process. Configuration Changes—to view current and optimized values of the antenna parameters.
When you have finished viewing results, click Close .
Mentum Planet User Guide 352
Chapter 15
Applying site selection and optimization changes Once you are satisfied with the prop osed optimization, you can apply the chang es to the network. You can choose to apply changes after the fi nal step or after a specific step. A step, during the site selection process, is the activation or deactivation of one additional s ite. A step, during the site optimization phase, contains the configu ration changes to all sectors of a specific site as well as all repeaters with a donor sector that belongs to that specific site.
To apply site selection changes 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Optimization categor y, right-click a scenario and choose Apply Site Selection Changes .
2
Choose one of the following options: n
n
Final Step —to apply the site activation/deactivation changes proposed after the optimization process is complete. Specific Step— to apply the the site activation/deactivation changes proposed after a specific step in the optimization process.
To apply optimization changes 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Optimization categor y, right-click a scenario and choose Display Optimization Report.
2
Choose one of the following options: n
n
Final Step —to apply the optimization changes proposed after the optimization process is complete. Specific Step— to apply the optimization changes proposed after a specific step in the optimization process.
353 Mentum Planet User Guide
Chapter 16 Planning Microwave Links You can visualize microwave links within the context of your Mentum Planet projects and perform basic microwave planning tasks when designing y our wireless network. This chapter covers the following topics:
Unde rstanding microw ave link planning
355
Workflow for microw ave link planning
357
De finingmicrowave settings
358
Addingprofilesource s
359
Configuringuse re quipme nt
360
Creating frequ e ncy plans
362
Understanding microwave links
363
Cre ating and configuring microw ave links Importing and e xporting microwave links
367 369
Creating a refl e ctionplane analysis
370
Analyz ingmicrow avelinks
372
Mentum Planet User Guide 354
Chapter 16
Understanding microwave link planning Good planning is an esse ntial element of network design. Although the focus of Mentum Planet is on wireless access networks, it is important to also consider the impact of the wireless backhaul or microwave transmission elements of the overall network. To do this, you can use the microwave link plann ing functionality contained within the Microwave category of the Project Explorer. Using the shortcut comm ands, you can create microwave links between two poi nts, analyze link perf ormance, and adjust microwave link settings to ensure that you achieve optimal link performance. NOTE: To use the microw ave link planning features, you must have a license.
Microwave link planning objectives Your central goal when using Mentum Planet is to squeeze as much capacity out of the network as you possible can without sacrificing the quality of the communication links while achieving as much coverage as possible. In order to achieve these goal s, you must also consider the quality and availability of microwave link connections that impact your wireless access network.
Recommendations The microwave functional ity available in Mentum Planet conforms to current ITU standards in order to determine: n
available and unavailable time
n
quality objectives and error performance
You can specify parameters related to the various ITU standards in the Microwave Settings dialog box. NOTE: ITU recommendations are available from the ITU website at www.itu.int.
355 Mentum Planet User Guide
Planning Microwave Links
Microwave data When you work with th e microwave featur es in Mentum Planet, data is saved in the Microwave folder with in the Mentum Plan et project folder. The data you define for microwave link planning is used solely with the microwave features. Microwave link planning data and results are intended to compliment the contents of your Mentum Planet project but microwave links are not taken into consideration when generating network analyses or Monte Carlo simulations.
Mentum Planet User Guide 356
Chapter 16
Workflow for microwave link planning Step 1
Define microwave setting s including data and profiles sources s uch as the AMSL, AGL, and AGL classified layer s. See "Defining microwave settings" on the facing page and"Adding profile sources" on page 359.
Step 2
Configure user equipment including antennas, radios, and feeders. See "Configuring user equipment" on page 360
Step 3
Specify frequency planning settings. See "Creating frequency plans" on page 362.
Step 4
Create a microwave link. See Creating a microwave link.
Step 5
Configure the microwave link such that you assign and confi gure antennas and associate channels w ith radio equipment. See "Creating and configuring microwave links" on pa ge 367.
Step 6
Optionally, create a r eflec tion plane analysis. See "Creating a reflection plane analysis" on page 370.
Step 7
Analyze microwave links. See "Analyzing microw ave links" on page 372.
357 Mentum Planet User Guide
Planning Microwave Links
Defining microwave settings Before planning microwave links, it is important to define microw ave s ettings so t hat result information is accurate. The GIS data defin ition comprises both the height and clutter as well as profil e sources such as the AMSL layer, the AGL layer, and the AGL classified g rid.
NOTE: The Microwave Settings Technical Note in the Help folder within the Mentum Planet installation details howavailable parameters are calculated.
To define microwave settings 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Microwave category, right-click Links and choose Microwave Settings.
2
Expand the GIS node and define data sources. While microwave geodata layers are independent of the Mentum Planet geodata layers and could be dif ferent, it is recommended that you use the same geodata layers for best results.
3
Expand the Microwave Modelsasnode define availability settings, performance settings, well and as propagation model parameters.
4
Expand the Profile node and set display options. For additional information, press F1.
Mentum Planet User Guide 358
Chapter 16
Adding profile sources The microwave functionality relies on geodata and profile sources that are used uniquely for microwave link planning. NOTE: User profiles, defined in the Link Editor, override GIS parameters defined in the Microwave Settings dialog box.
To add profile sources 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Microwave category, right-click the Links node and choose Microwave Settings.
2
Expand the GIS node and choose Data Sources .
3
To add a new layer, do any of the following: n
n
To add a new vecto r layer, on the GIS/Data Sources panel, choose the Vector node and click the Add Layer button. To add a new raster layer, on the GIS/Data Sources panel, choose the Raster node and click the Add Layer button.
4
If you are adding a new vector layer, in the New Vector Layer dialog box, in the Name box, type a name for the layer and then specify either the vector file itself or the folder where it is saved.
5
If you are adding a new raster layer, in the New Raster Layer dialog box, in the Name box, type a name for the layer and then specify either the raster file itself or the folder where it is saved.
6
Click OK.
7
In the Microwave Settings dialog box, choose another node in the tree view or click OK.
359 Mentum Planet User Guide
Planning Microwave Links
Configuring user equipment In order to ensure that the microwave links are modeled correctly, you must accurately configure user equipment such as radios and feeder cables.
To configure radios 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Microwave category, right+click Radios and choose Add to add a new radio type to the project. Planning equipment files have a .pef ex tension.
2
Right-click the radio type you want to configure and choose Edit. The Equipment Editor opens.
3
In the tree view, double-click the radio to view radio parameters.
4
Change radio parameters as required. Press F1 for more information.
5
Click the Save button.
TIP: To add a new radio config uration, open the Default Radio equipment, right-click the top-level node and choose New Radio Configuration.
To configure feeder cables 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Microwave category, right-click the Feeders node and choose Add. Planning equipment feeder files have a .pff e xtension.
2
In the tree view, double-click the feeder to view feeder
3
parameters. In the Feeder Editor , edit the name, manufacturer, model and loss values for the feeder as required, and click OK.
Mentum Planet User Guide 360
Chapter 16
TIP: To add a new feeder to the project, right-click the Feeders no de and choose New.
361 Mentum Planet User Guide
Planning Microwave Links
Creating frequency plans To ensure efficient use of spectrum, minimize interference, and increase network capacity, you need to have the best possible frequen cy plan.
To create frequency plans 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Microwave category, right-click the Frequency Plans node, and choose New. The Frequency Plan Editor opens.
2
3
From the Built-In Library list, choose a frequency plan to use pre-defined values or choose user-defined to specify values. Click OK. Press F1 for more information.
NOTE: If you have more than one frequency plan in you r project, right-click the frequency plan that you want to use for automatic channel assignment and set it to be the Active plan.
Mentum Planet User Guide 362
Chapter 16
Understanding microwave links In order to validate the quality of microwave links, you need to determine the pointto-point visibility between the end-points of each link. Once you have created the link, you can view quality, availability, and clearance information in the Link Editor .
Figure 16.1: Microwave link planning line of sight with Fresnel zone. Link profiles encompass several layers of information including: n
n
an AMSL layer (e.g., terrain heights, scanned maps, photo maps) an AGL layer (e.g., clutter heights, vector building heights or elevation heights)
n
an AGL classified layer
n
a user-defined layer
NOTE: These layers are used only for microwave link plann ing and must be defined in the micro wave setting s. See "Defining microwave s ettings" on page 358.
AMSL layers The AMSL (Above Mean Sea Level) layer is a raster grid that contains height values for specified distances at defined intervals from site A. Intermediate points along the profile are c alculated using a linear interpolation method. You can create an AMSL layer using the User Profile Editor.
363 Mentum Planet User Guide
Planning Microwave Links
Figure 16.2: Link Editor showing profile source list where y ou can c reate layers by clicking the hyperlinks. AMSL data is adjusted to account for the earth curvature where the radius equals 637 km.This radius is modified to take into account propag ation with a k factor set, by default, to 1.33. The longer the microwave link, the more pronounced the earth curvature will appear in the Link Editor path profile display. NOTE: The AMSL data is automatically adjusted to account for the earth curvature.
Mentum Planet User Guide 364
Chapter 16
AGL layers The AGL (Above Ground Level) layer is a raster grid. There are three types of AGL layers: n
AGL Layer — consists of an above ground level raster layer that contains the terrai n slope. It is comprised of an ob stacle list including the distance length of the profile from the first link site, the height, and the
n
n
Classified AGL Layer —consists of points where each point of the layer is associated to a value that belongs to a defined set of values. User Obstacles —consists of user-d efined obstacl es. You can define five types of obstacles: n
Tree—a green layer displays on the profile
n
Building—a gray layer displays on the profile
n
Water tower —a dark gray layer displays on the profile
n
Mill—a dark red layer displays on the profile
n
Mixed —a black layer displays the profile
You can create AGL layers in the Link Editor using raster data such as clutter heights or a vector layer that consists of obstacle outlines associated along with the associated height.
Figure 16.3: Profile with obstacles
365 Mentum Planet User Guide
Planning Microwave Links
Link clearance Display colors provide a quick visual summary of the clearance conditions between two sites. n
n
n
Green —indicates that line-of-sight and clearance conditions between the two sites are met Yellow—indicates that the two sites are in line-of-sight but that the clearance conditions are not met Red—indicates that the two sites are obstructed
You can display profile c learances for all available antenna c onfigurations.
Antennas You can display link profiles and clearance ellipsoids for each antenna configuration and use the buttons on each side of the profile view to display the profile ellipsoids. To display the clearan ce ellipsoid between two selected antennas, enable the antenna buttons. For each microwave link, radio diversity is configured and diversity antennas installed on both sites. On site A, the main antenn a is on one tower and the diversity antenna is on another one. On Site B, the main antenna and the diversity antenna are installed on the same tower. You can view various profiles using the buttons on either side of the display window in the Link Editor. For example, you can display a prof ile between the main antenna A and the main antenna B or a profile between the main antenna A and the main antenna B alongside the diversity antenna A and the main antenna B.
Mentum Planet User Guide 366
Chapter 16
Creating and configuring microwave links After you create a link between two points, you need to c onfigure link parameter s in order to model real-world conditions as close as possible. You do this in the Lin k Editor.
To create a microwave link n
Do one of the follow ing: n
n
n
In the Project Explorer , in the Sites c ategory, Ctrl+click to select the sites at the start and end of the microwave link. In the Project Explorer , in the Microwave category, rightclick the Links node and choose New From Map Coordinates, define the longitude and latitude for Site A and Site B, or get the coordinates from the map, and then click OK. Right-click the Links node and choose New, then select the sites at the start and end of the microwave link and click OK.
The link is added to the Project Explorer beneath the Links node.
To configure microwave link parameters 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Microwave categor y, expand the Links node and double-click the microwave link for which you want to define parameters.
2
In the Link Editor, define link parameters as required on the following tabs: n
n
n
n
Sites—define site parameters including name, elevation, location as well as details abou t the tower such as name, antenna, height, longitude offset. Parameters for both site A and site B are contained on the Sites tab. Description—define the antenna system at each site including antenna type, height, azimuth, tilt, and rad ome loss Repeater—add a repeater and define the repeater type and associated parameters. Channels—define radio parameters.
367 Mentum Planet User Guide
Planning Microwave Links
n
n
n
n
n
Results—review link budget results. Profile—specify microwave link geodata and profile sources, or generate AMSL, AGL AGL classif ied, user obst acles, or ground type layers. Settings—specify user-defined project s ettings includin g calculation param eters and link display settings. Reflection—specify reflection analysis settings and generate the analysis . Misc —specify additional link profile path details.
Press F1 for more information.
3
To modify antenna heights in order to achieve clearance, click the Optimize The Antenna Heights button on the Microwave toolbar.
4
To re-position antennas so they are directly facing each other, click the Antennas Alignment button on the Microwave toolbar.
NOTE: Parameters defined in the Link Editor are link specific and override parameters defined in the Microwave Settings dialog box.
Mentum Planet User Guide 368
Chapter 16
Importing and exporting microwave links Data associated with each microwave link is saved in a Link (.mlink) file. Once you have defined the parameters associated with a microwave link, you can export link data to a .mlink file. You can export link data from a Mentum Ellipse project or from a Mentum Planet project. Then, to save time, you can impo rt the .ml ink file into Mentum Planet.
To import microwave links 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Microwave category, right-click the Links node and choose Import.
2
In the Import Microwave Link dialog box, click the Select Microwave Links button and navigate to the .mlinks file you want to import, and click Open.
3
Click Import.
To export microwave links 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Microwave categor y, expand the Links node and double-click the link for which you want to export data.
2
In the Link Editor, click the Export Microwave Link button on the Microwave toolbar.
3
In the Export Link To File dialog box, specify a name and location and click Save.
369 Mentum Planet User Guide
Planning Microwave Links
Creating a reflection plane analysis In microwave link planning, you want line of sight between two poin ts. In order to assess the quality of the line of sight and determine the impact of reflections on the link path, you can create a reflection p lane analysis.
To create reflection plane analysis 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Microwave category, expand the Links node, and double-click the link for which you want to create a reflection plane analysis. The Frequency Plan Editor opens.
2
Click the Reflection tab.
3
Enable the Use Reflection Plane check box and define reflection analysis settings.
4
Click the Reflective Plane Analysis button on the Microwave toolbar.
Mentum Planet User Guide 370
Chapter 16
5
Click OK. Press F1 for more information.
371 Mentum Planet User Guide
Planning Microwave Links
Analyzing microwave links There are many statistics available to help you better understand microwave link performance. NOTE: The details generated fo r microwave links are intended to provide you with information you can use to better understand how the microwave element of the network behaves. links are not c onsidered in network analysis or Monte Carlo s Microwave imulation results.
To analyze link profiles 1
In the Project Explorer , in the Microwavecategory, do one of the following: n
n
Right-click the link you wan t to analyze and choose Analyze. Ctrl+click to se lect more than one lin k, right-click and choose Analyze .
The Link Analysis Results dialog box opens.
Mentum Planet User Guide 372
Chapter 16
2
In the tree view, click the node to view details in the right-hand panel.
3
To export result data to PDF, click Export To PDF .
4
To save report information, click Save. The analysis results are added beneath the Analyses node.
373 Mentum Planet User Guide
Chapter 17 Using The Extension Manager You can extend the Mentum Plan et feature set by adding tools and links. This chapter describes how to to do this using the Extension Manag er. For detailed examples, see the Customizing Mentum Planet Using the Extension Manager Application Note . This chapter covers the following topics:
Customizing Mentum Planet us ing the Extensi on Manager 375
Mentum Planet User Guide 374
Chapter 17
Customizing Mentum Planet using the Extension Manager You can use the Extension Manager to add tools or links to Mentum Planet. When you install a Mentu m Planet (.pex) ex tension, it is copied to the Documents and Settings folder. A .pex file is a compressed file that contains at a minimu m an .xml file with the necessary instructions and structure. The Customizing Mentum Planet Using Extensions Appli cation Note details how to create .pex files for various app lications. You can find this document in the Help folder. NOTE: You can download addi tional extensions from mentum .com/extension s.
CAUTION: The compressed .pex file cannot be a .rar archive file. I t must be a compressed zip file or folder.
To add an extension 1
ChooseTools
Extension Manager .
The Extension Manager opens.
2
Click the Install button.
375 Mentum Planet User Guide
Using The Extension Manager
3
Navigate to where the Mentum Planet (.pex) extension file is saved and click Open. The extension is added to the tree view.
To uninstall an extension 1
In the tree view, select an extension and click the Uninstall button.
2
Read the confirmation message and click Yes . All files associated with the extension will be deleted when Mentum Planet is re-opened.
To save the extension 1
In the tree view, select an ex tension and click th e Save button.
2
In the Save As dialog box, navigate to the folder where you want to save the .pex file and click Save .
To enable or disable an extension 1
In the tree view, do one of the following: n
n
2
To disable an exte nsion, clear the check box next to the extension or extension component. No files are deleted. To enable an extensio n, enable the check box next to the extension or extension component.
Click Close .
TIP: Use the Tool Manager command accessib le from the GIS
Tools menu
to add the Sync W indows functionality to Mentum Planet. Using the Sync Windows feature enables you to easily compare layers in separate windows.
Mentum Planet User Guide 376
Chapter 18 Working With Gri ds Gridding is the basic mapping technique used in Mentum Planet. The Grid Manager is the central dialo g box from which you can open, sort, view, and manipulate grids. Mentum Planet also has tools that enable you to retrieve information from grids and perform basic topological analysis. This chapter covers the following topics:
Ge tting information about a grid Contouringagrid
379 383
Cre ating smoothgrid contours
387
Cre ating slope and aspe ct grids
393
Workingw ithare agrids Analyzing visibility og a nrid
395 398
Mentum Planet User Guide 378
Chapter 18
Getting information about a grid You can use the following tools to retrieve grid information: n
n
n
n
n
n
n
Grid Legend—displays the color scheme and value ranges used for the map display. Grid Manager Info Function —provides information about the grid, including metadata. Grid Info Tool —returns information about the selected geographical location from all grids currently open in the Grid Manager. The grid files being insp ected do not have to be layers in the current Map window. Region Info Tool —displays a statistical summary of the data within a selected region for all active grids in the Grid Manager. Line Info Tool—displays a statistical summary of the data along a selected line for the grid highlighted in the Grid Manager. Find Maximum Point Tool —finds the highest point in a region. This is an aid to finding good locations for sites. For more information, see “Using sector placement tools” . Grid Query Tool—builds new grids from existing grids where the new grid values are derived according to whether specific queries imposed on the existing grid files have been met. For more information, see the Grid Analysis User Guide .
n
Grid Calculator Tool —creates mathematical expressions using an unlimited number of grids. For more information, see the Grid Analysis User Guide .
NOTE: To get additional information on analysis files, you can use the Layer Statistics tool. For more infor mation, see the appropriate technology-specif ic Us er Guide.
To view a grid legend A legend displays map information such as the color scheme used for the map display. You can quickly view legends in order to imp rove the readabil ity of a map.
1
ChooseView
Grid Legend .
379 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Grids
2
In the Grid Legend dialog box, choose the grid file for which you want to see the legend. Only grid files that are currently open appear in the list.
3
ChooseOptions Color Tool to view the Dictionary Editor (for .grc files) or the Grid Color Tool ( for .grd files) and modify the appearance of the legend. For more information on modifying legends, see “Creating and printing legends” .
To use the Grid Manager Info function 1
If the Grid Manager is not visi ble, chooseView Manager.
2
In the Grid Manager, choose a grid from the list, and click the Info button.
Grid
The Grid Manager lists only grids that are currently open in the project. You can open other grids as needed from the Grid Manag er. For more Info information the types information available using the Grid Manager function,about see Chapter 5, of “Working with the Gri d Manager”, in the Grid Analysis User Guide .
To use the Grid Info tool 1
On the Analysis toolbar, click th e Grid Info button.
2
Click in the Map window. The Grid Info dialog box opens, listing the value of each open grid at the cursor location . You can click the Map to view inform ation for other locations. The Cursor Tracking option p rovides a c ontinuous display of data as you change the c ursor position. The Capture Data option captures data to a table. For more information, see “ Using the Grid Info tool” in Chapter 5 of the Grid Analysis U ser Guide .
Mentum Planet User Guide 380
Chapter 18
TIP: You can specify Grid In fo options in the Prefer ences dialog box acce ssible by choosing GIS Grid Analysis Preferences .
TIP: If you need to inspect a large nu mber of predefined points, you can use the Point Inspection function. For more information, see the Grid Analysis Us er Guide .
To use the Region Info tool 1
ChooseView
Toolbars .
2
In the Toolbar Options dialog box, enable the Grid Analysis check box, and click OK.
3
On the Grid Analysis toolbar, click the Region Info button.
4
Select a region in the Map window.
The Volume calculation is the sum of all the values found in the region multiplied by the bin dimensions. This value is only meaningf ul when the z-unit is a linear measurement. The % null value indicates how much of the enclosed area contains null values. TIP: To view s tatistical inform ation for a large numb er of regions contained in the same table, use the Region Insp ection function. For more information about region inspection, see the Grid Analysis U ser Guide .
To use the Line Info tool 1
ChooseView
Toolbars .
2
In the Toolbar Options dialog box, enable the Grid Analysis check box, and click OK.
3
On the Grid Analysis toolbar, click th e Line Info button.
4
Click on a line in the Map window.
381 Mentum Planet User Guide
Working With Grids
NOTE: The number of samples taken along the line is determined b y the Cross Section: No. of Samp les parameter in the Prefer ences s ettings. The default is 100. To change this value, choose GIS ä Grid Analysis ä Preferences and enter a new number in the No. of Samples box. For more inform ation about preferences, see the Grid Analysis U ser Guide .
NOTE: You can choose whether or not values are interpolated with in bins by enabling or clearing the Use Closest Node Values check box on the z-units tab in the Grid Manager Info function.
NOTE: To view information for a large numb er of lines c ontained in the same table, use the Line Inspection fun ction. For more information about line inspection, see the Grid Analysis Us er Guide .
Mentum Planet User Guide 382
Chapter 18
Contouring a grid Mentum Planet provides tools to convert grids to attribute-coded vector files using processes that thread isoli nes, or contours, through the grid network ( Figure 18.1). Contour lines are paths of constant values. Mentum Planet computes c ontour lines as separate polylines or closed complex regions where holes or islands have been “knocked-out”. This is important in the GIS environment because the contour regions can immediately be used for analysis.
Figure 18.1: Lines are thread ed through bins at defined values.
Creating contours for a numeric grid A s tandard contour line map can be generated from within Men tum Planet using a process that threads polylines through an existing grid file. You can define a number of settings includin g the range of grid values to be contoured, the contour interval, and the color and style of ind ividual contour lines. These settings can be save d in a configuration file and applied to other grid files. You can also generate contours as topologically built regions using a process similar to the polyline threader. Contour region intervals are user-defin ed with the additional option of applying a custom gradient color ramp to assign incremental colors to the contour regions. For contour regions, you can define the Greater than or Equal to Lower Value (>=Value) and the Less t han Upper Value (
View more...
Comments
